Download Vendor Technical Guide Zyxel NBG4604

NBG4604
Wireless N Gigabit Managed Router
Default Login Details
IP Address
http://192.168.1.1
Username/
Password
admin
/1234
Username/
Password
supervisor
/supervisor
www.zyxel.com
Firmware
Version 1.0
Edition 4, 10/2010
www.zyxel.com
Copyright © 2010
ZyXEL Communications Corporation
About This User's Guide
About This User's Guide
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for people who want to configure the NBG4604 using the
Web Configurator. You should have at least a basic knowledge of TCP/IP
networking concepts and topology.
Tips for Reading User’s Guides On-Screen
When reading a ZyXEL User’s Guide On-Screen, keep the following in mind:
• If you don’t already have the latest version of Adobe Reader, you can download
it from http://www.adobe.com.
• Use the PDF’s bookmarks to quickly navigate to the areas that interest you.
Adobe Reader’s bookmarks pane opens by default in all ZyXEL User’s Guide
PDFs.
• If you know the page number or know vaguely which page-range you want to
view, you can enter a number in the toolbar in Reader, then press [ENTER] to
jump directly to that page.
• Type [CTRL]+[F] to open the Adobe Reader search utility and enter a word or
phrase. This can help you quickly pinpoint the information you require. You can
also enter text directly into the toolbar in Reader.
• To quickly move around within a page, press the [SPACE] bar. This turns your
cursor into a “hand” with which you can grab the page and move it around freely
on your screen.
• Embedded hyperlinks are actually cross-references to related text. Click them to
jump to the corresponding section of the User’s Guide PDF.
Related Documentation
• Quick Start Guide
The Quick Start Guide is designed to help you get your NBG4604 up and running
right away. It contains information on setting up your network and configuring
for Internet access.
• Supporting Disc
The embedded Web Help contains descriptions of individual screens and
supplementary information.
• Support Disc
Refer to the included CD for support documents.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
3
About This User's Guide
Documentation Feedback
Send your comments, questions or suggestions to: [email protected]
Thank you!
The Technical Writing Team, ZyXEL Communications Corp.,
6 Innovation Road II, Science-Based Industrial Park, Hsinchu, 30099, Taiwan.
Need More Help?
More help is available at www.zyxel.com.
• Download Library
Search for the latest product updates and documentation from this link. Read
the Tech Doc Overview to find out how to efficiently use the User Guide, Quick
Start Guide and Command Line Interface Reference Guide in order to better
understand how to use your product.
• Knowledge Base
If you have a specific question about your product, the answer may be here.
This is a collection of answers to previously asked questions about ZyXEL
products.
• Forum
This contains discussions on ZyXEL products. Learn from others who use ZyXEL
products and share your experiences as well.
4
NBG4604 User’s Guide
About This User's Guide
Customer Support
Should problems arise that cannot be solved by the methods listed above, you
should contact your vendor. If you cannot contact your vendor, then contact a
ZyXEL office for the region in which you bought the device.
See http://www.zyxel.com/web/contact_us.php for contact information. Please
have the following information ready when you contact an office.
• Product model and serial number.
• Warranty Information.
• Date that you received your device.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
5
Document Conventions
Document Conventions
Warnings and Notes
These are how warnings and notes are shown in this User’s Guide.
Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device.
Note: Notes tell you other important information (for example, other things you may
need to configure or helpful tips) or recommendations.
Syntax Conventions
• The NBG4604 may be referred to as the “NBG4604”, the “device”, the “product”
or the “system” in this User’s Guide.
• Product labels, screen names, field labels and field choices are all in bold font.
• A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text, for example,
[ENTER] means the “enter” or “return” key on your keyboard.
• “Enter” means for you to type one or more characters and then press the
[ENTER] key. “Select” or “choose” means for you to use one of the predefined
choices.
• A right angle bracket ( > ) within a screen name denotes a mouse click. For
example, Maintenance > Log > Log Setting means you first click
Maintenance in the navigation panel, then the Log sub menu and finally the
Log Setting tab to get to that screen.
• Units of measurement may denote the “metric” value or the “scientific” value.
For example, “k” for kilo may denote “1000” or “1024”, “M” for mega may
denote “1000000” or “1048576” and so on.
• “e.g.,” is a shorthand for “for instance”, and “i.e.,” means “that is” or “in other
words”.
6
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Document Conventions
Icons Used in Figures
Figures in this User’s Guide may use the following generic icons. The NBG4604
icon is not an exact representation of your device.
NBG4604
Computer
Notebook computer
Server
Modem
Firewall
Telephone
Switch
Router
NBG4604 User’s Guide
7
Safety Warnings
Safety Warnings
• Do NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming
pool.
• Do NOT expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids.
• Do NOT store things on the device.
• Do NOT install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk
of electric shock from lightning.
• Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device.
• Do NOT open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to
dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY qualified service personnel should
service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information.
• Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports.
• Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them.
• Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling.
• Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device.
• Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in
North America or 230V AC in Europe).
• Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the
product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord.
• Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause
electrocution.
• If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, remove it from the power outlet.
• Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord. Contact your local vendor to order a
new one.
• Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a
remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
• Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots, as insufficient airflow may harm your
device.
• Antenna Warning! This device meets ETSI and FCC certification requirements when using
the included antenna(s). Only use the included antenna(s).
• If you wall mount your device, make sure that no electrical lines, gas or water pipes will
be damaged.
• This CPE is indoor use only. (Utilisation intérieure exclusivement.)
Your product is marked with this symbol, which is known as the WEEE mark. WEEE
stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment. It means that used electrical
and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste. Used electrical and
electronic equipment should be treated separately.
8
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Contents Overview
Contents Overview
User’s Guide ........................................................................................................................... 19
Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 21
The WPS Button ........................................................................................................................ 25
The Web Configurator ............................................................................................................... 27
Connection Wizard .................................................................................................................... 39
AP Mode .................................................................................................................................... 55
Tutorials ..................................................................................................................................... 63
Technical Reference .............................................................................................................. 75
Wireless LAN ............................................................................................................................. 77
WAN ........................................................................................................................................ 101
LAN ...........................................................................................................................................113
DHCP Server ............................................................................................................................117
Network Address Translation (NAT) ........................................................................................ 123
Dynamic DNS .......................................................................................................................... 131
Firewall .................................................................................................................................... 135
Content Filtering ...................................................................................................................... 143
Static Route ............................................................................................................................. 147
Bandwidth Management .......................................................................................................... 151
Remote Management .............................................................................................................. 159
Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) ............................................................................................. 171
System ..................................................................................................................................... 179
Logs ......................................................................................................................................... 185
Tools ........................................................................................................................................ 189
Sys OP Mode .......................................................................................................................... 195
Language ................................................................................................................................. 199
Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................... 201
Product Specifications ............................................................................................................. 209
NBG4604 User’s Guide
9
Contents Overview
10
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
About This User's Guide .......................................................................................................... 3
Document Conventions............................................................................................................ 6
Safety Warnings........................................................................................................................ 8
Contents Overview ................................................................................................................... 9
Table of Contents.................................................................................................................... 11
Part I: User’s Guide................................................................................ 19
Chapter 1
Introduction ............................................................................................................................. 21
1.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 21
1.2 Applications ......................................................................................................................... 21
1.3 Ways to Manage the NBG4604 ........................................................................................... 22
1.4 Good Habits for Managing the NBG4604 ............................................................................ 22
1.5 LEDs .................................................................................................................................... 22
Chapter 2
The WPS Button...................................................................................................................... 25
2.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 25
Chapter 3
The Web Configurator ............................................................................................................ 27
3.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 27
3.2 Login Accounts .................................................................................................................... 27
3.3 Accessing the Web Configurator ......................................................................................... 28
3.4 Resetting the NBG4604 ....................................................................................................... 30
3.4.1 Procedure to Use the Reset Button ........................................................................... 30
3.5 Navigating the Web Configurator
...................................................................................... 30
3.6 Status Screen (Router Mode) .............................................................................................. 30
3.6.1 Navigation Panel ........................................................................................................ 33
3.6.2 Summary: DHCP Table
........................................................................................... 35
3.6.3 Summary: Packet Statistics
..................................................................................... 36
3.6.4 Summary: WLAN Station Status
NBG4604 User’s Guide
............................................................................ 37
11
Table of Contents
Chapter 4
Connection Wizard ................................................................................................................. 39
4.1 Wizard Setup ....................................................................................................................... 39
4.2 Connection Wizard: STEP 1: System Information ............................................................... 40
4.2.1 System Name ............................................................................................................. 40
4.2.2 Domain Name ............................................................................................................ 41
4.3 Connection Wizard: STEP 2: Wireless LAN ........................................................................ 42
4.3.1 Extend (WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK) Security ............................................................... 44
4.4 Connection Wizard: STEP 3: Internet Configuration ........................................................... 44
4.4.1 Ethernet Connection .................................................................................................. 45
4.4.2 PPPoE Connection .................................................................................................... 46
4.4.3 PPTP Connection ....................................................................................................... 47
4.4.4 Your IP Address ......................................................................................................... 48
4.4.5 WAN IP Address Assignment ..................................................................................... 49
4.4.6 IP Address and Subnet Mask ..................................................................................... 49
4.4.7 DNS Server Address Assignment .............................................................................. 50
4.4.8 WAN IP and DNS Server Address Assignment ......................................................... 51
4.4.9 WAN MAC Address .................................................................................................... 52
4.5 Connection Wizard Complete .............................................................................................. 53
Chapter 5
AP Mode................................................................................................................................... 55
5.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 55
5.2 Setting your NBG4604 to AP Mode ..................................................................................... 55
5.3 Status Screen (AP Mode) .................................................................................................... 56
5.3.1 Navigation Panel ........................................................................................................ 58
5.4 Configuring Your Settings .................................................................................................... 60
5.4.1 LAN Settings .............................................................................................................. 60
5.4.2 WLAN and Maintenance Settings .............................................................................. 60
5.5 Logging in to the Web Configurator in AP Mode ................................................................. 61
Chapter 6
Tutorials ................................................................................................................................... 63
6.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 63
6.2 How to Connect to the Internet from an AP ......................................................................... 63
6.2.1 Configure Wireless Security Using WPS on both your NBG4604 and Wireless Client 63
6.2.2 Enable and Configure Wireless Security without WPS on your NBG4604 ................ 67
6.3 Bandwidth Management for your Network ........................................................................... 70
6.3.1 Configuring Bandwidth Management by Application .................................................. 70
6.3.2 Configuring Bandwidth Management by Custom Application .................................... 71
6.3.3 Configuring Bandwidth Allocation by IP or IP Range ................................................. 72
12
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Table of Contents
Part II: Technical Reference .................................................................. 75
Chapter 7
Wireless LAN........................................................................................................................... 77
7.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 77
7.2 What You Can Do ................................................................................................................ 78
7.3 What You Should Know ....................................................................................................... 78
7.3.1 Wireless Security Overview ....................................................................................... 78
7.4 General Wireless LAN Screen ............................................................................................ 81
7.4.1 No Security ................................................................................................................. 83
7.4.2 WEP Encryption ......................................................................................................... 84
7.4.3 WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK ................................................................................................ 86
7.5 MAC Filter ............................................................................................................................ 87
7.6 Wireless LAN Advanced Screen ......................................................................................... 89
7.7 Quality of Service (QoS) Screen ......................................................................................... 90
7.7.1 Application Priority Configuration ............................................................................... 92
7.8 WPS Screen ........................................................................................................................ 93
7.9 WPS Station Screen ............................................................................................................ 94
7.10 Scheduling Screen ............................................................................................................ 95
7.11 WDS Screen ...................................................................................................................... 96
7.11.1 Security Mode: Static WEP ...................................................................................... 98
7.11.2 Security Mode: WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK ..................................................................... 99
Chapter 8
WAN........................................................................................................................................ 101
8.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 101
8.2 What You Can Do .............................................................................................................. 101
8.3 What You Need To Know ................................................................................................... 102
8.3.1 Configuring Your Internet Connection ...................................................................... 102
8.3.2 Multicast ................................................................................................................... 103
8.3.3 NetBIOS over TCP/IP .............................................................................................. 104
8.3.4 Auto-Bridge .............................................................................................................. 104
8.4 Internet Connection ........................................................................................................... 105
8.4.1 Ethernet Encapsulation ............................................................................................ 105
8.4.2 PPPoE Encapsulation .............................................................................................. 106
8.4.3 PPTP Encapsulation ................................................................................................ 108
8.5 Advanced WAN Screen ......................................................................................................111
Chapter 9
LAN......................................................................................................................................... 113
9.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................113
9.2 What You Can Do ...............................................................................................................113
9.3 What You Need To Know ....................................................................................................114
NBG4604 User’s Guide
13
Table of Contents
9.3.1 IP Pool Setup ............................................................................................................114
9.3.2 LAN TCP/IP ...............................................................................................................114
9.4 LAN IP Screen ....................................................................................................................115
Chapter 10
DHCP Server.......................................................................................................................... 117
10.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................117
10.2 What You Can Do .............................................................................................................117
10.3 What You Need To Know ..................................................................................................117
10.4 General Screen ................................................................................................................118
10.5 Advanced Screen
..........................................................................................................118
10.6 Client List Screen ............................................................................................................ 120
Chapter 11
Network Address Translation (NAT).................................................................................... 123
11.1 Overview
....................................................................................................................... 123
11.2 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................ 124
11.3 General NAT Screen ........................................................................................................ 124
11.4 NAT Application Screen ................................................................................................. 125
11.5 NAT Advanced Screen ..................................................................................................... 128
11.5.1 Trigger Port Forwarding Example ........................................................................... 129
11.5.2 Two Points To Remember About Trigger Ports ...................................................... 130
Chapter 12
Dynamic DNS ........................................................................................................................ 131
12.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 131
12.2 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................ 131
12.3 What You Need To Know ................................................................................................. 131
12.3.1 DynDNS Wildcard .................................................................................................. 131
12.4 Dynamic DNS Screen .................................................................................................... 132
Chapter 13
Firewall................................................................................................................................... 135
13.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 135
13.2 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................ 136
13.3 What You Need To Know ................................................................................................. 136
13.3.1 About the NBG4604 Firewall .................................................................................. 136
13.4 General Firewall Screen
............................................................................................... 137
13.5 The Access Control Rule Screen .................................................................................... 137
13.5.1 Add/Edit an ACL Rule
13.6 Services Screen
.......................................................................................... 139
........................................................................................................... 140
Chapter 14
Content Filtering ................................................................................................................... 143
14
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Table of Contents
14.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 143
14.2 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................ 143
14.3 What You Need To Know ................................................................................................. 143
14.3.1 Content Filtering Profiles ........................................................................................ 143
14.4 Filter Screen .................................................................................................................... 144
14.5 Technical Reference ........................................................................................................ 145
14.5.1 Customizing Keyword Blocking URL Checking ...................................................... 145
Chapter 15
Static Route ........................................................................................................................... 147
15.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 147
15.2 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................ 147
15.3 IP Static Route Screen .................................................................................................... 148
15.3.1 Static Route Setup Screen ................................................................................... 149
Chapter 16
Bandwidth Management....................................................................................................... 151
16.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 151
16.2 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................ 151
16.3 What You Need To Know ................................................................................................. 152
16.4 General Configuration ................................................................................................... 152
16.5 Advanced Configuration ................................................................................................. 153
16.5.1 Priority Levels ......................................................................................................... 156
16.5.2 User Defined Service Rule Configuration
........................................................... 156
16.5.3 Predefined Bandwidth Management Services ....................................................... 157
16.5.4 Services and Port Numbers ................................................................................... 158
Chapter 17
Remote Management............................................................................................................ 159
17.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 159
17.2 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................ 159
17.3 What You Need To Know ................................................................................................. 160
17.3.1 Remote Management Limitations .......................................................................... 160
17.3.2 Remote Management and NAT .............................................................................. 160
17.3.3 System Timeout ..................................................................................................... 160
17.4 WWW Screen
............................................................................................................... 161
17.5 The Telnet Screen ........................................................................................................... 162
17.6 The FTP Screen .............................................................................................................. 162
17.7 The SNMP Screen ........................................................................................................... 163
17.7.1 Configuring SNMP ................................................................................................. 165
17.8 The ACS Screen .............................................................................................................. 166
17.9 ACS Screen ..................................................................................................................... 167
17.9.1 STUN ..................................................................................................................... 167
NBG4604 User’s Guide
15
Table of Contents
17.10 Technical Reference ...................................................................................................... 170
Chapter 18
Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP).......................................................................................... 171
18.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 171
18.2 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................ 171
18.3 What You Need to Know .................................................................................................. 171
18.4 UPnP Screen ................................................................................................................... 172
18.5 Technical Reference ........................................................................................................ 173
18.5.1 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example ................................................................... 173
18.5.2 Web Configurator Easy Access ............................................................................. 176
Chapter 19
System ................................................................................................................................... 179
19.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 179
19.2 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................ 179
19.3 System General Screen ................................................................................................. 179
19.4 Time Setting Screen ........................................................................................................ 181
Chapter 20
Logs ....................................................................................................................................... 185
20.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 185
20.2 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................ 185
20.3 What You Need to Know .................................................................................................. 185
20.4 View Log Screen .............................................................................................................. 186
20.5 Log Settings Screen ........................................................................................................ 187
Chapter 21
Tools....................................................................................................................................... 189
21.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 189
21.2 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................ 189
21.3 Firmware Upload Screen ................................................................................................. 189
21.4 Configuration Screen ....................................................................................................... 192
21.4.1 Backup Configuration ............................................................................................. 192
21.4.2 Restore Configuration ............................................................................................ 193
21.4.3 Back to Factory Defaults ........................................................................................ 194
21.5 Restart Screen ................................................................................................................. 194
Chapter 22
Sys OP Mode ......................................................................................................................... 195
22.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 195
22.2 What You Can Do ............................................................................................................ 195
22.3 What You Need to Know .................................................................................................. 196
16
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Table of Contents
22.4 General Screen ............................................................................................................... 197
Chapter 23
Language ............................................................................................................................... 199
23.1 Language Screen ............................................................................................................ 199
Chapter 24
Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................... 201
24.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs ...................................................................... 201
24.2 NBG4604 Access and Login ........................................................................................... 202
24.3 Internet Access ................................................................................................................ 204
24.4 Resetting the NBG4604 to Its Factory Defaults ............................................................... 205
24.5 Wireless Router/AP Troubleshooting ............................................................................... 206
Chapter 25
Product Specifications ......................................................................................................... 209
25.1 Wall-mounting Instructions ...............................................................................................211
Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting ........................................................................... 213
Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions ........................................ 223
Appendix C Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address ........................................................... 231
25.1.1 Verifying Settings ................................................................................................... 248
Appendix D Wireless LANs .................................................................................................. 249
25.1.2 WPA(2)-PSK Application Example ......................................................................... 259
25.1.3 WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example ........................................................... 259
Appendix E Services ............................................................................................................ 261
Appendix F .......................................................................................................................... 265
Appendix F Open Software Announcements ....................................................................... 265
Appendix G Legal Information.............................................................................................. 283
Index....................................................................................................................................... 287
NBG4604 User’s Guide
17
Table of Contents
18
NBG4604 User’s Guide
P ART I
User’s Guide
19
20
CHAPTER
1
Introduction
1.1 Overview
This chapter introduces the main features and applications of the NBG4604.
The NBG4604 extends the range of your existing wired network without additional
wiring, providing easy network access to mobile users. You can set up a wireless
network with other IEEE 802.11b/g/n compatible devices.
A range of services such as a firewall and content filtering are also available for
secure Internet computing.
1.2 Applications
Your can create the following networks using the NBG4604:
• Wired. You can connect network devices via the Ethernet ports of the NBG4604
so that they can communicate with each other and access the Internet.
• Wireless. Wireless clients can connect to the NBG4604 to access network
resources.
• WAN. Connect to a broadband modem/router for Internet access.
Figure 1 NBG4604 Network
NBG4604 User’s Guide
21
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.3 Ways to Manage the NBG4604
Use any of the following methods to manage the NBG4604.
• WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup). You can use the WPS button or the WPS section of
the Web Configurator to set up a wireless network with your ZyXEL Device.
• Web Configurator. This is recommended for everyday management of the
NBG4604 using a (supported) web browser.
1.4 Good Habits for Managing the NBG4604
Do the following things regularly to make the NBG4604 more secure and to
manage the NBG4604 more effectively.
• Change the password. Use a password that’s not easy to guess and that consists
of different types of characters, such as numbers and letters.
• Write down the password and put it in a safe place.
• Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it).
Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes
unstable or even crashes. If you forget your password, you will have to reset the
NBG4604 to its factory default settings. If you backed up an earlier
configuration file, you would not have to totally re-configure the NBG4604. You
could simply restore your last configuration.
1.5 LEDs
Figure 2 Front Panel
The following table describes the LEDs and the WPS button.
Table 1 Front Panel LEDs and WPS Button
22
LED
COLOR
STATUS
DESCRIPTION
POWER
Green
On
The NBG4604 is receiving power and functioning
properly.
Off
The NBG4604 is not receiving power.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 1 Introduction
Table 1 Front Panel LEDs and WPS Button
LED
COLOR
STATUS
DESCRIPTION
WLAN
Green
On
The NBG4604 is ready, but is not sending/
receiving data through the wireless LAN.
Blinking
The NBG4604 is sending/receiving data through
the wireless LAN.
The NBG4604 is negotiating a WPS connection
with a wireless client.
WPS
WAN
LAN 1-4
WPS Button
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Green
Green
Green
Off
The wireless LAN is not ready or has failed.
On
The NBG4604 is ready, but is not sending/
receiving data through the WPS connection.
Blinking
The NBG4604 is sending/receiving data through
the WPS connection.
Off
The WPS connection is not ready or has failed.
On
The NBG4604 has a successful 10/100/1000 MB
WAN connection.
Blinking
The NBG4604 is sending/receiving data through
the WAN.
Off
The WAN connection is not ready, or has failed.
On
The NBG4604 has a successful 10/100/1000 MB
Ethernet connection.
Blinking
The NBG4604 is sending/receiving data through
the LAN.
Off
The LAN is not connected.
Press this button for 1 second to set up a wireless connection via WiFi
Protected Setup with another WPS-enabled client. You must press the
WPS button on the client side within 120 seconds for a successful
connection.
23
Chapter 1 Introduction
24
NBG4604 User’s Guide
CHAPTER
2
The WPS Button
2.1 Overview
Your NBG4604 supports WiFi Protected Setup (WPS), which is an easy way to set
up a secure wireless network. WPS is an industry standard specification, defined
by the WiFi Alliance.
WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without
having to configure security settings manually. Each WPS connection works
between two devices. Both devices must support WPS (check each device’s
documentation to make sure).
Depending on the devices you have, you can either press a button (on the device
itself, or in its configuration utility) or enter a PIN (a unique Personal Identification
Number that allows one device to authenticate the other) in each of the two
devices. When WPS is activated on a device, it has two minutes to find another
device that also has WPS activated. Then, the two devices connect and set up a
secure network by themselves.
For more information on using WPS, see Section 6.2.1 on page 63.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
25
Chapter 2 The WPS Button
26
NBG4604 User’s Guide
CHAPTER
3
The Web Configurator
3.1 Overview
This chapter describes how to access the NBG4604 Web Configurator and provides
an overview of its screens.
The Web Configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy
setup and management of the NBG4604 via Internet browser. Use Internet
Explorer 7.0 and later or Firefox 1.5 and later. The recommended screen
resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels.
In order to use the Web Configurator you need to allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows from your device. Web pop-up blocking is enabled
by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2.
• JavaScript (enabled by default).
• Java permissions (enabled by default).
Refer to the Troubleshooting chapter to see how to make sure these functions are
allowed in Internet Explorer.
3.2 Login Accounts
There are two system accounts that you can use to log in to the NBG4604:
“admin” and “supervisor”. These two accounts have different privilege levels.
The web configurator screens vary depending on which account you use to log in.
The supervisor account allows you full access to all system configurations. The
default supervisor user name is “supervisor” and password ¡s “supervisor”.
With the admin account, you cannot access Remote MGMT screens and can only
view the Sys OP Mode screen. The default username is “admin” and password is
“1234”.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
27
Chapter 3 The Web Configurator
3.3 Accessing the Web Configurator
1
Make sure your NBG4604 hardware is properly connected and prepare your
computer or computer network to connect to the NBG4604 (refer to the Quick
Start Guide).
2
Launch your web browser.
3
Type "http://192.168.1.1" as the website address. Your computer must be in the
same subnet in order to access this website address.
4
If you are logging in with the “admin” account, type “1234” (default) as the
password. If you are logging in with the “supervisor” account, type “supervisor”
(default) as the password. Then click Login. In some versions, the default
password appears automatically - if this is the case, click Login.
Figure 3 Admin Account Login
Figure 4 Supervisor Account Login
28
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 3 The Web Configurator
5
You should see a screen asking you to change your password (highly
recommended) as shown next. Type a new password (and retype it to confirm)
and click Apply or click Ignore.
Note: The management session automatically times out when the time period set in
the Administrator Inactivity Timer field expires (default five minutes). Simply
log back into the NBG4604 if this happens.
6
Select the setup mode you want to use.
• Click Go to Wizard Setup to use the Configuration Wizard for basic Internet
and Wireless setup.
• Click Go to Advanced Setup to view and configure all the NBG4604’s
settings.
• Select a language to go to the basic Web Configurator in that language. To
change to the advanced configurator see Chapter 23 on page 199.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
29
Chapter 3 The Web Configurator
3.4 Resetting the NBG4604
If you forget your password or IP address, or you cannot access the Web
Configurator, you will need to use the RESET button at the back of the NBG4604
to reload the factory-default configuration file. This means that you will lose all
configurations that you had previously saved, the password will be reset to “1234”
and the IP address will be reset to “192.168.1.1”.
3.4.1 Procedure to Use the Reset Button
1
Make sure the power LED is on.
2
Press the RESET button for longer than 1 second to restart/reboot the NBG4604.
3
Press the RESET button for longer than five seconds to set the NBG4604 back to
its factory-default configurations.
3.5 Navigating the Web Configurator
The following summarizes how to navigate the Web Configurator from the Status
screen in Router Mode and AP Mode.
3.6 Status Screen (Router Mode)
Click on Status. The screen below shows the status screen in Router Mode.
30
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 3 The Web Configurator
(For information on the status screen in AP Mode see Chapter 5 on page 56.)
Figure 5 Status Screen (Router Mode)
The following table describes the icons shown in the Status screen.
Table 2 Status Screen Icon Key
ICON
DESCRIPTION
Click this icon to open the setup wizard.
Click this icon to view copyright and a link for related product information.
Click this icon at any time to exit the Web Configurator.
Select a number of seconds or None from the drop-down list box to refresh
all screen statistics automatically at the end of every time interval or to not
refresh the screen statistics.
Click this button to refresh the status screen statistics.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
31
Chapter 3 The Web Configurator
The following table describes the labels shown in the Status screen.
Table 3 Web Configurator Status Screen (Router Mode)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Device Information
System Name
This is the System Name you enter in the Maintenance > System >
General screen. It is for identification purposes.
Firmware Version
This is the firmware version and the date created.
WAN Information
- MAC Address
This shows the WAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device.
- IP Address
This shows the WAN port’s IP address.
- IP Subnet Mask
This shows the WAN port’s subnet mask.
- DHCP
This shows the WAN port’s DHCP role - Client or None.
LAN Information
- MAC Address
This shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device.
- IP Address
This shows the LAN port’s IP address.
- IP Subnet Mask
This shows the LAN port’s subnet mask.
- DHCP
This shows the LAN port’s DHCP role - Server or None.
WLAN Information
- MAC Address
This shows the wireless adapter MAC Address of your device.
- Status
This shows the current status of the Wireless LAN - On or Off.
- Channel
This shows the channel number which you select manually.
- Operating Channel
This shows the channel number which the NBG4604 is currently using
over the wireless LAN.
- 802.11 Mode
This shows the wireless standard.
- SSID
This shows a descriptive name used to identify the NBG4604 in the
wireless LAN.
- WPS
This displays Configured when the WPS has been set up.
This displays Unconfigured if the WPS has not been set up.
Click the status to display Network > Wireless LAN > WPS screen.
System Status
System Up Time
This is the total time the NBG4604 has been on.
Current Date/Time
This field displays your NBG4604’s present date and time.
System Resource
- CPU Usage
This displays what percentage of the NBG4604’s processing ability is
currently used. When this percentage is close to 100%, the NBG4604 is
running at full load, and the throughput is not going to improve anymore.
If you want some applications to have more throughput, you should turn
off other applications.
- Memory Usage
This shows what percentage of the heap memory the NBG4604 is using.
System Setting
- Firewall
32
This shows whether the firewall is active or not.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 3 The Web Configurator
Table 3 Web Configurator Status Screen (Router Mode) (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
- Bandwidth
Management
This shows whether bandwidth management is active or not.
- UPnP
This shows whether UPnP is active or not.
Interface Status
Interface
This displays the NBG4604 port types. The port types are: WAN, LAN and
WLAN.
Status
For the LAN and WAN ports, this field displays Down (line is down) or Up
(line is up or connected).
For the WLAN, it displays Up when the WLAN is enabled or Down when
the WLAN is disabled.
Rate
For the LAN ports, this displays the port speed and duplex setting or N/A
when the line is disconnected.
For the WLAN, it displays the maximum transmission rate when the WLAN
is enabled and N/A when the WLAN is disabled.
Summary
DHCP Table
Use this screen to view current DHCP client information.
Packet Statistics
Use this screen to view port status and packet specific statistics.
WLAN Station Status
Use this screen to view the wireless stations that are currently associated
to the NBG4604.
3.6.1 Navigation Panel
Use the sub-menus on the navigation panel to configure NBG4604 features.
The following table describes the sub-menus.
Table 4 Screens Summary
LINK
Status
TAB
FUNCTION
This screen shows the NBG4604’s general device, system
and interface status information. Use this screen to
access the wizard, and summary statistics tables.
Network
NBG4604 User’s Guide
33
Chapter 3 The Web Configurator
Table 4 Screens Summary
LINK
TAB
FUNCTION
General
Use this screen to configure wireless LAN.
MAC Filter
Use the MAC filter screen to configure the NBG4604 to
block access to devices or block the devices from
accessing the NBG4604.
Advanced
This screen allows you to configure advanced wireless
settings.
QoS
Use this screen to configure Wi-Fi Multimedia Quality of
Service (WMM QoS). WMM QoS allows you to prioritize
wireless traffic according to the delivery requirements of
individual services.
WPS
Use this screen to configure WPS.
WPS Station
Use this screen to add a wireless station using WPS.
Scheduling
Use this screen to schedule the times the Wireless LAN is
enabled.
WDS
Use this screen to set up Wireless Distribution System
(WDS) on your NBG4604.
Internet
Connection
This screen allows you to configure ISP parameters, WAN
IP address assignment, DNS servers and the WAN MAC
address.
Advanced
Use this screen to configure other advanced properties.
LAN
IP
Use this screen to configure LAN IP address and subnet
mask.
DHCP
Server
General
Use this screen to enable the NBG4604’s DHCP server.
Advanced
Use this screen to assign IP addresses to specific
individual computers based on their MAC addresses and
to have DNS servers assigned by the DHCP server.
Client List
Use this screen to view current DHCP client information
and to always assign an IP address to a MAC address
(and host name).
General
Use this screen to enable NAT.
Application
Use this screen to configure servers behind the
NBG4604.
Advanced
Use this screen to change your NBG4604’s port triggering
settings.
General
Use this screen to set up dynamic DNS.
General
Use this screen to activate/deactivate the firewall.
Access
Control Rule
Use this screen to view the configured access control
rules and add, edit or remove a rule.
Services
This screen shows a summary of the firewall rules, and
allows you to edit/add a firewall rule.
Filter
Use this screen to block certain web features and sites
containing certain keywords in the URL.
Wireless
LAN
WAN
NAT
DDNS
Security
Firewall
Content
Filter
Management
34
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 3 The Web Configurator
Table 4 Screens Summary
LINK
TAB
FUNCTION
Static
Route
IP Static
Route
Use this screen to configure IP static routes.
Bandwidth
MGMT
General
Use this screen to configure a bandwidth management
service type.
Advanced
Use this screen to configure bandwidth management for
specific types of applications.
WWW
Use this screen to configure through which interface(s)
and from which IP address(es) users can use HTTP to
manage the NBG4604.
Telnet
Use this screen to configure through which interface(s)
and from which IP address(es) users can use Telnet to
manage the NBG4604.
FTP
Use this screen to configure through which interface(s)
and from which IP address(es) users can use FTP to
access the NBG4604
SNMP
Use this screen to configure through which interface(s)
and from which IP address(es) users can access the
SNMP agent on the NBG4604.
ACS
Use this screen configure ACS and upload security
certificates to the device.
General
Use this screen to enable UPnP on the NBG4604.
General
Use this screen to view and change administrative
settings such as system and domain names, password
and inactivity timer.
Time Setting
Use this screen to change your NBG4604’s time and
date.
View Log
Use this screen to view the logs for the categories that
you selected.
Log Settings
Use this screen to activate syslog logging as well as the
syslog server IP address.
Firmware
Use this screen to upload firmware to your NBG4604.
Configuration
Use this screen to backup and restore the configuration
or reset the factory defaults to your NBG4604.
Restart
This screen allows you to reboot the NBG4604 without
turning the power off.
General
This screen allows you to select whether your device acts
as a Router or a Access Point.
Remote
MGMT
UPnP
Maintenance
System
Logs
Tools
Sys OP
Mode
Language
This screen allows you to select the language you prefer.
3.6.2 Summary: DHCP Table
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows
individual clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can
configure the NBG4604’s LAN as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a
NBG4604 User’s Guide
35
Chapter 3 The Web Configurator
server, the NBG4604 provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If DHCP
service is disabled, you must have another DHCP server on that network, or else
the computer must be manually configured.
Click the DHCP Table (Details...) hyperlink in the Status screen. Read-only
information here relates to your DHCP status. The DHCP table shows current
DHCP client information (including IP Address, Host Name and MAC Address)
of all network clients using the NBG4604’s DHCP server.
Figure 6 Summary: DHCP Table
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 5 Summary: DHCP Table
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
#
This is the index number of the host computer.
IP Address
This field displays the IP address relative to the # field listed above.
Host Name
This field displays the computer host name.
MAC Address
This field shows the MAC address of the computer with the name in the
Host Name field.
Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address
which uniquely identifies a device. The MAC address is assigned at the
factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example,
00:A0:C5:00:00:02.
Refresh
Click Refresh to renew the screen.
3.6.3 Summary: Packet Statistics
Click the Packet Statistics (Details...) hyperlink in the Status screen. Readonly information here includes port status, packet specific statistics and the
36
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 3 The Web Configurator
"system up time". The Poll Interval(s) field is configurable and is used for
refreshing the screen.
Figure 7 Summary: Packet Statistics
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 6 Summary: Packet Statistics
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Port
This is the NBG4604’s port type.
Status
For the LAN ports, this displays the port speed and duplex setting or
Down when the line is disconnected.
For the WAN port, it displays the port speed and duplex setting if
you’re using Ethernet encapsulation and Idle (line (ppp) idle), Dial
(starting to trigger a call) and Drop (dropping a call) if you're using
PPPoE or PPTP encapsulation. This field displays Down when the line
is disconnected.
For the WLAN, it displays the maximum transmission rate when the
WLAN is enabled and Down when the WLAN is disabled.
TxPkts
This is the number of transmitted packets on this port.
RxPkts
This is the number of received packets on this port.
Collisions
This is the number of collisions on this port.
Tx B/s
This displays the transmission speed in bytes per second on this port.
Rx B/s
This displays the reception speed in bytes per second on this port.
System Up Time
This is the total time the NBG4604 has been on.
Poll Interval(s)
Enter the time interval for refreshing statistics in this field.
Set Interval
Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Poll
Interval(s) field.
Stop
Click Stop to stop refreshing statistics.
3.6.4 Summary: WLAN Station Status
Click the WLAN Station Status (Details...) hyperlink in the Status screen. View
the wireless stations that are currently associated to the NBG4604 in the
Association List. Association means that a wireless client (for example, your
NBG4604 User’s Guide
37
Chapter 3 The Web Configurator
network or computer with a wireless network card) has connected successfully to
the AP (or wireless router) using the same SSID, channel and security settings.
Figure 8 Summary: Wireless Association List
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 7 Summary: Wireless Association List
38
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
#
This is the index number of an associated wireless station.
MAC Address
This field displays the MAC address of an associated wireless station.
Association Time
This field displays the time a wireless station first associated with the
NBG4604’s WLAN network.
Refresh
Click Refresh to reload the list.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
CHAPTER
4
Connection Wizard
4.1 Wizard Setup
This chapter provides information on the wizard setup screens in the Web
Configurator.
The Web Configurator’s wizard setup helps you configure your device to access the
Internet. Refer to your ISP (Internet Service Provider) checklist in the Quick Start
Guide to know what to enter in each field. Leave a field blank if you don’t have
that information.
1
After you access the NBG4604 Web Configurator, click the Go to Wizard setup
hyperlink.
You can click Go to Advanced setup hyperlink to skip this wizard setup and
configure basic or advanced features accordingly.
Figure 9 Select Wizard or Advanced Mode
NBG4604 User’s Guide
39
Chapter 4 Connection Wizard
2
Choose a language by clicking on the language’s button. The screen will update.
Click the Next button to proceed to the next screen.
Figure 10 Select a Language
3
Read the on-screen information and click Next.
Figure 11 Welcome to the Connection Wizard
4.2 Connection Wizard: STEP 1: System
Information
System Information contains administrative and system-related information.
4.2.1 System Name
System Name is for identification purposes. However, because some ISPs check
this name you should enter your computer's "Computer Name".
40
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Connection Wizard
To view (or set) your computer name in Windows, right click over My Computer
on your desktop, then select Properties. When the System Properties window
opens, select the Computer Name tab.
Figure 12 Computer Name
4.2.2 Domain Name
The Domain Name entry is what is propagated to the DHCP clients on the LAN. If
you leave this blank, the domain name obtained by DHCP from the ISP is used.
While you must enter the host name (System Name) on each individual computer,
the domain name can be assigned from the NBG4604 via DHCP.
Click Next to configure the NBG4604 for Internet access.
Figure 13 Wizard Step 1: System Information
NBG4604 User’s Guide
41
Chapter 4 Connection Wizard
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 8 Wizard Step 1: System Information
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
System
Name
System Name is a unique name to identify the NBG4604 in an Ethernet
network. Enter a descriptive name. This name can be up to 30
alphanumeric characters long. Spaces are not allowed, but dashes "-" and
underscores "_" are accepted.
Domain
Name
Type the domain name (if you know it) here. If you leave this field blank,
the ISP may assign a domain name via DHCP. The domain name entered
by you is given priority over the ISP assigned domain name.
Back
Click Back to display the previous screen.
Next
Click Next to proceed to the next screen.
Exit
Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.
4.3 Connection Wizard: STEP 2: Wireless LAN
Set up your wireless LAN using the following screen.
Figure 14 Wizard Step 2: Wireless LAN
42
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Connection Wizard
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 9 Wizard Step 2: Wireless LAN
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Name
(SSID)
Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable 7-bit ASCII characters) for the
wireless LAN.
If you change this field on the NBG4604, make sure all wireless stations
use the same SSID in order to access the network.
Security
Select a Security level from the drop-down list box.
Choose Auto (WPA2-PSK) to have the NBG4604 generate a pre-shared
key automatically. After you click Next a screen pops up displaying the
generated pre-shared key. Write down the key for use later when
connecting other wireless devices to your network. Click OK to continue.
Choose None to have no wireless LAN security configured. If you do not
enable any wireless security on your NBG4604, your network is accessible
to any wireless networking device that is within range. If you choose this
option, skip directly to Section 4.4 on page 44.
Choose Extend (WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK) security to configure a PreShared Key. Choose this option only if your wireless clients support WPAPSK or WPA2-PSK respectively. If you choose this option, skip directly to
Section 4.3.1 on page 44.
Channel
Selection
The range of radio frequencies used by IEEE 802.11b/g/n wireless devices
is called a channel. The device will automatically select the channel with
the least interference.
Back
Click Back to display the previous screen.
Next
Click Next to proceed to the next screen.
Exit
Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.
Note: The wireless stations and NBG4604 must use the same SSID, channel ID,
WPA-PSK (if WPA-PSK is enabled) or WPA2-PSK (if WPA2-PSK is enabled) for
wireless communication.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
43
Chapter 4 Connection Wizard
4.3.1 Extend (WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK) Security
Choose Extend (WPA-PSK) or Extend (WPA2-PSK) security in the Wireless
LAN setup screen to set up a Pre-Shared Key.
Figure 15 Wizard Step 2: Extend (WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK) Security
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 10 Wizard Step 2: Extend (WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK) Security
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Pre-Shared
Key
Type from 8 to 63 case-sensitive ASCII or 64 HEX characters. You can set
up the most secure wireless connection by configuring WPA in the wireless
LAN screens. You need to configure an authentication server to do this.
Back
Click Back to display the previous screen.
Next
Click Next to proceed to the next screen.
Exit
Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.
4.4 Connection Wizard: STEP 3: Internet
Configuration
The NBG4604 offers three Internet connection types. They are Ethernet, PPP
over Ethernet or PPTP. The wizard attempts to detect which WAN connection
type you are using. If the wizard does not detect a connection type, you must
select one from the drop-down list box. Check with your ISP to make sure you use
the correct type.
44
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Connection Wizard
This wizard screen varies according to the connection type that you select.
Figure 16 Wizard Step 3: ISP Parameters.
The following table describes the labels in this screen,
Table 11 Wizard Step 3: ISP Parameters
CONNECTION
TYPE
DESCRIPTION
Ethernet
Select the Ethernet option when the WAN port is used as a regular
Ethernet.
PPPoE
Select the PPP over Ethernet option for a dial-up connection. If
your ISP gave you an IP address and/or subnet mask, then select
PPTP.
PPTP
Select the PPTP option for a dial-up connection.
4.4.1 Ethernet Connection
Choose Ethernet when the WAN port is used as a regular Ethernet. Continue to
Section 4.4.4 on page 48.
Figure 17 Wizard Step 3: Ethernet Connection
NBG4604 User’s Guide
45
Chapter 4 Connection Wizard
4.4.2 PPPoE Connection
Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) functions as a dial-up connection.
PPPoE is an IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force) standard specifying how a host
personal computer interacts with a broadband modem (for example DSL, cable,
wireless, etc.) to achieve access to high-speed data networks.
For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that
works with existing access control systems (for instance, RADIUS).
One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let end users access one of multiple
network services, a function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the
service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for specific users.
Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both the subscriber and the ISP/
carrier, as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the
subscriber’s site.
By implementing PPPoE directly on the NBG4604 (rather than individual
computers), the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed,
since the NBG4604 does that part of the task. Furthermore, with NAT, all of the
LAN's computers will have Internet access.
Refer to the appendix for more information on PPPoE.
Figure 18 Wizard Step 3: PPPoE Connection
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 12 Wizard Step 3: PPPoE Connection
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
ISP Parameter for Internet Access
46
Connection
Type
Select the PPP over Ethernet option for a dial-up connection.
Service Name
Type the name of your service provider.
User Name
Type the user name given to you by your ISP.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Connection Wizard
Table 12 Wizard Step 3: PPPoE Connection
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Password
Type the password associated with the user name above.
Back
Click Back to return to the previous screen.
Next
Click Next to continue.
Exit
Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.
4.4.3 PPTP Connection
Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) is a network protocol that enables
transfers of data from a remote client to a private server, creating a Virtual Private
Network (VPN) using TCP/IP-based networks.
PPTP supports on-demand, multi-protocol, and virtual private networking over
public networks, such as the Internet.
Refer to the appendix for more information on PPTP.
Note: The NBG4604 supports one PPTP server connection at any given time.
Figure 19 Wizard Step 3: PPTP Connection
NBG4604 User’s Guide
47
Chapter 4 Connection Wizard
The following table describes the fields in this screen
Table 13 Wizard Step 3: PPTP Connection
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
ISP Parameters for Internet Access
Connection Type
Select PPTP from the drop-down list box. To configure a PPTP client,
you must configure the User Name and Password fields for a PPP
connection and the PPTP parameters for a PPTP connection.
User Name
Type the user name given to you by your ISP.
Password
Type the password associated with the User Name above.
PPTP Configuration
Server IP
Address
Type the IP address of the PPTP server.
Connection ID/
Name
Enter the connection ID or connection name in this field. It must follow
the "c:id" and "n:name" format. For example, C:12 or N:My ISP.
This field is optional and depends on the requirements of your ISP.
Get
automatically
from ISP
Select this radio button if your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP
address.
Use fixed IP
address
Select this radio button, provided by your ISP to give the NBG4604 a
fixed, unique IP address.
My IP
Address
Type the (static) IP address assigned to you by your ISP.
My IP Subnet
Mask
Type the subnet mask assigned to you by your ISP (if given).
Back
Click Back to return to the previous screen.
Next
Click Next to continue.
Exit
Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.
4.4.4 Your IP Address
The following wizard screen allows you to assign a fixed IP address or give the
NBG4604 an automatically assigned IP address depending on your ISP.
Figure 20 Wizard Step 3: Your IP Address
48
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Connection Wizard
The following table describes the labels in this screen
Table 14 Wizard Step 3: Your IP Address
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Get automatically from
your ISP
Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP
address. This is the default selection. If you choose this option,
skip directly to Section 4.4.9 on page 52.
Use fixed IP address
provided by your ISP
Select this option if you were given IP address and/or DNS server
settings by the ISP. The fixed IP address should be in the same
subnet as your broadband modem or router.
Back
Click Back to return to the previous screen.
Next
Click Next to continue.
Exit
Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.
4.4.5 WAN IP Address Assignment
Every computer on the Internet must have a unique IP address. If your networks
are isolated from the Internet, for instance, only between your two branch offices,
you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the
Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has reserved the following three
blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks.
Table 15 Private IP Address Ranges
10.0.0.0
-
10.255.255.255
172.16.0.0
-
172.31.255.255
192.168.0.0
-
192.168.255.255
You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP or have it assigned by
a private network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access
is through an ISP, the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your
local networks. On the other hand, if you are part of a much larger organization,
you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses.
Note: Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address;
always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address
assignment, please refer to RFC 1597, Address Allocation for Private Internets
and RFC 1466, Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space.
4.4.6 IP Address and Subnet Mask
Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name, so too do
computers on a LAN share one common network number.
Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If
the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP
NBG4604 User’s Guide
49
Chapter 4 Connection Wizard
addresses, follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet
mask.
If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you
have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when
the connection is established. The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA)
reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use; please do not use any
other number unless you are told otherwise. Let's say you select 192.168.1.0 as
the network number; which covers 254 individual addresses, from 192.168.1.1 to
192.168.1.254 (zero and 255 are reserved). In other words, the first three
numbers specify the network number while the last number identifies an individual
computer on that network.
Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address that is easy to
remember, for instance, 192.168.1.1, for your NBG4604, but make sure that no
other device on your network is using that IP address.
The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your
NBG4604 will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address
that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by the
NBG4604 unless you are instructed to do otherwise.
4.4.7 DNS Server Address Assignment
Use DNS (Domain Name System) to map a domain name to its corresponding IP
address and vice versa, for instance, the IP address of www.zyxel.com is
204.217.0.2. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must
know the IP address of a computer before you can access it.
The NBG4604 can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways.
50
1
The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information
sheet, when you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, enter them
in the DNS Server fields in the Wizard and/or WAN > Internet Connection
screen.
2
If the ISP did not give you DNS server information, leave the DNS Server fields
set to 0.0.0.0 in the Wizard screen and/or set to From ISP in the WAN >
Internet Connection screen for the ISP to dynamically assign the DNS server IP
addresses.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Connection Wizard
4.4.8 WAN IP and DNS Server Address Assignment
The following wizard screen allows you to assign a fixed WAN IP address and DNS
server addresses.
Figure 21 Wizard Step 3: WAN IP and DNS Server Addresses
The following table describes the labels in this screen
Table 16 Wizard Step 3: WAN IP and DNS Server Addresses
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
WAN IP Address Assignment
My WAN IP Address
Enter your WAN IP address in this field. The WAN IP address
should be in the same subnet as your DSL/Cable modem or
router.
My WAN IP Subnet
Mask
Enter the IP subnet mask in this field.
Gateway IP Address
Enter the gateway IP address in this field.
System DNS Server Address Assignment (if applicable)
DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP
address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you
must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The NBG4604 uses a
system DNS server (in the order you specify here) to resolve domain names for DDNS and
the time server.
First DNS Server
Enter the DNS server's IP address in the fields provided.
Second DNS Server
If you do not configure a system DNS server, you must use IP
addresses when configuring DDNS and the time server.
Back
Click Back to return to the previous screen.
Next
Click Next to continue.
Exit
Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
51
Chapter 4 Connection Wizard
4.4.9 WAN MAC Address
Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC
address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal
characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02.
Table 17 Example of Network Properties for LAN Servers with Fixed IP Addresses
Choose an IP address
192.168.1.2-192.168.1.32; 192.168.1.65-192.168.1.254.
Subnet mask
255.255.255.0
Gateway (or default route)
192.168.1.1(NBG4604 LAN IP)
This screen allows users to configure the WAN port's MAC address by either using
the NBG4604’s MAC address, copying the MAC address from a computer on your
LAN or manually entering a MAC address. Once it is successfully configured, the
address will be copied to configuration file. It is advisable to clone the MAC
address from a computer on your LAN even if your ISP does not presently require
MAC address authentication.
Figure 22 Wizard Step 3: WAN MAC Address
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 18 Wizard Step 3: WAN MAC Address
52
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Factory Default
Select Factory Default to use the factory assigned default MAC
address.
Clone the
computer’s MAC
address
Select this option and enter the IP address of the computer on the
LAN whose MAC you are cloning. It is advisable to clone the MAC
address from a computer on your LAN even if your ISP does not
presently require MAC address authentication.
Set WAN MAC
Address
Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use.
Back
Click Back to return to the previous screen.
Next
Click Next to continue.
Exit
Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Connection Wizard
4.5 Connection Wizard Complete
Click Finish to complete the wizard setup.
Figure 23 Connection Wizard Complete
Well done! You have successfully set up your NBG4604 to operate on your network
and access the Internet.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
53
Chapter 4 Connection Wizard
54
NBG4604 User’s Guide
CHAPTER
5
AP Mode
5.1 Overview
This chapter discusses how to configure settings while your NBG4604 is set to AP
Mode. Many screens that are available in Router Mode are not available in AP
Mode.
Note: See Chapter 6 on page 63 for an example of setting up a wireless network in
AP mode.
Use your NBG4604 as an AP if you already have a router or gateway on your
network. In this mode your device bridges a wired network (LAN) and wireless
LAN (WLAN) in the same subnet. See the figure below for an example.
Figure 24 Wireless Internet Access in AP Mode
5.2 Setting your NBG4604 to AP Mode
1
Log into the Web Configurator if you haven’t already. See the Quick start Guide for
instructions on how to do this.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
55
Chapter 5 AP Mode
2
To set your NBG4604 to AP Mode, go to Maintenance > Sys OP Mode >
General and select Access Point.
Figure 25 Maintenance > Sys OP Mode > General
3
A pop-up appears providing information on this mode. Click OK in the pop-up
message window. (See Section 22.4 on page 197 for more information on the
pop-up.) Click Apply. Your NBG4604 is now in AP Mode.
Note: You have to log in to the Web Configurator again when you change modes.
5.3 Status Screen (AP Mode)
Click on Status. The screen below shows the status screen in AP Mode.
Figure 26 Status Screen (AP Mode)
56
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 5 AP Mode
The following table describes the labels shown in the Status screen.
Table 19 Status Screen (AP Mode)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Device Information
System Name
This is the System Name you enter in the Maintenance > System >
General screen. It is for identification purposes.
Firmware Version
This is the firmware version and the date created.
LAN Information
- MAC Address
This shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device.
- IP Address
This shows the LAN port’s IP address.
- IP Subnet Mask
This shows the LAN port’s subnet mask.
- DHCP
This shows the LAN port’s DHCP role - Client.
WLAN Information
- MAC Address
This shows the wireless adapter MAC Address of your device.
- Status
This shows the current status of the Wireless LAN - On or Off.
- Channel
This shows the channel number which you select manually.
- Operating Channel
This shows the channel number which the NBG4604 is currently using
over the wireless LAN.
- 802.11 Mode
This shows the IEEE 802.11 standard that the NBG4604 supports.
Wireless clients must support the same standard in order to be able to
connect to the NBG4604
- SSID
This shows a descriptive name used to identify the NBG4604 in the
wireless LAN.
- WPS
This shows the WPS (WiFi Protected Setup) Status. Click the status to
display Network > Wireless LAN > WPS screen.
System Status
System Up Time
This is the total time the NBG4604 has been on.
Current Date/Time
This field displays your NBG4604’s present date and time.
System Resource
- CPU Usage
This displays what percentage of the NBG4604’s processing ability is
currently used. When this percentage is close to 100%, the NBG4604 is
running at full load, and the throughput is not going to improve anymore.
If you want some applications to have more throughput, you should turn
off other applications.
- Memory Usage
This shows what percentage of the heap memory the NBG4604 is using.
Interface Status
Interface
This displays the NBG4604 port types. The port types are: LAN and
WLAN.
Status
For the LAN port, this field displays Down (line is down) or Up (line is up
or connected).
For the WLAN, it displays Up when the WLAN is enabled or Down when
the WLAN is disabled.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
57
Chapter 5 AP Mode
Table 19 Status Screen (AP Mode) (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Rate
For the LAN ports, this displays the port speed and duplex setting or N/A
when the line is disconnected.
For the WLAN, it displays the maximum transmission rate when the WLAN
is enabled and N/A when the WLAN is disabled.
Summary
Packet Statistics
Use this screen to view port status and packet specific statistics.
WLAN Station Status
Use this screen to view the wireless stations that are currently associated
to the NBG4604.
5.3.1 Navigation Panel
Use the menu in the navigation panel to configure NBG4604 features in AP Mode.
The following screen and table show the features you can configure in AP Mode.
Figure 27 Menu: AP Mode
The following table describes the sub-menus.
Table 20 Menu: AP Mode
LINK
Status
TAB
FUNCTION
This screen shows the NBG4604’s general device,
system and interface status information. Use this screen
to access the wizard, and summary statistics tables.
Network
58
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 5 AP Mode
Table 20 Menu: AP Mode
LINK
Wireless
LAN
LAN
TAB
FUNCTION
General
Use this screen to configure wireless LAN.
MAC Filter
Use the MAC filter screen to configure the NBG4604 to
block access to devices or block the devices from
accessing the NBG4604.
Advanced
This screen allows you to configure advanced wireless
settings.
QoS
Use this screen to configure Wi-Fi Multimedia Quality of
Service (WMM QoS). WMM QoS allows you to prioritize
wireless traffic according to the delivery requirements of
individual services.
WPS
Use this screen to configure WPS.
WPS Station
Use this screen to add a wireless station using WPS.
Scheduling
Use this screen to schedule the times the Wireless LAN
is enabled.
WDS
Use this screen to set up Wireless Distribution System
(WDS) on your NBG4604.
IP
Use this screen to configure LAN IP address and subnet
mask or to get the LAN IP address from a DHCP server.
General
Use this screen configure ACS.
Certificate
Use this screen to upload security certificates to the
device.
General
Use this screen to view and change administrative
settings such as system and domain names, password
and inactivity timer.
Time Setting
Use this screen to change your NBG4604’s time and
date.
View Log
Use this screen to view the logs for the categories that
you selected.
Log Settings
Use this screen to activate syslog logging as well as the
syslog server IP address.
Firmware
Use this screen to upload firmware to your NBG4604.
Configuration
Use this screen to backup and restore the configuration
or reset the factory defaults to your NBG4604.
Restart
This screen allows you to reboot the NBG4604 without
turning the power off.
General
This screen allows you to select whether your device
acts as a Router or a Access Point.
Management
ACS
Maintenance
System
Logs
Tools
Sys OP
Mode
Language
NBG4604 User’s Guide
This screen allows you to select the language you prefer.
59
Chapter 5 AP Mode
5.4 Configuring Your Settings
Use this section to configure your NBG4604 settings while in AP Mode.
5.4.1 LAN Settings
Click Network > LAN to see the screen below.
Note: If you change the IP address of the NBG4604 in the screen below, you will need
to log into the NBG4604 again using the new IP address.
Figure 28 Network > LAN > IP
The table below describes the labels in the screen.
Table 21 Network > LAN > IP
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Get from
DHCP Server
Select this to let the DHCP server in the gateway assign the NBG4604 IP
address.
User Defined
LAN IP
Select this to give the NBG4604 a static IP address.
IP Address
Type the IP address in dotted decimal notatiion. The default setting is
192.168.1.2. If you change the IP address you will have to log in again
with the new IP address.
IP Subnet
Mask
The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address.
Your NBG4604 will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the
IP address that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use
the subnet mask computed by the NBG4604.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes to the NBG4604.
Reset
Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen.
5.4.2 WLAN and Maintenance Settings
The configuration of wireless and maintenance settings in AP Mode is the same as
for Router Mode.
• See Chapter 5 on page 69 for information on the configuring your wireless
network.
60
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 5 AP Mode
• See Chapter 19 on page 179 for information on configuring your maintenance
settings.
5.5 Logging in to the Web Configurator in AP
Mode
1
Connect your computer to the LAN port of the NBG4604.
2
The default IP address of the NBG4604 is “192.168.1.2”. In this case, your
computer must have an IP address in the range between “192.168.1.3” and
“192.168.1.254”.
3
Click Start > Run on your computer in Windows.
4
Type “cmd” in the dialog box.
5
Type “ipconfig” to show your computer’s IP address. If your computer’s IP address
is not in the correct range then see Appendix C on page 231 for information on
changing your computer’s IP address.
6
After you’ve set your computer’s IP address, open a web browser such as Internet
Explorer and type “192.168.1.2” as the web address in your web browser.
See Chapter 6 on page 63 for a tutorial on setting up a network with an AP.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
61
Chapter 5 AP Mode
62
NBG4604 User’s Guide
CHAPTER
6
Tutorials
6.1 Overview
This chapter provides tutorials for your NBG4604 as follows:
• How to Connect to the Internet from an AP
• Configure Wireless Security Using WPS on both your NBG4604 and Wireless
Client
• Enable and Configure Wireless Security without WPS on your NBG4604
• Bandwidth Management for your Network
6.2 How to Connect to the Internet from an AP
This section gives you an example of how to set up an access point (AP) and
wireless client (a notebook, B in this example) for wireless communication. B can
access the Internet through the AP wirelessly.
Figure 29 Wireless AP Connection to the Internet
6.2.1 Configure Wireless Security Using WPS on both your
NBG4604 and Wireless Client
This section gives you an example of how to set up wireless network using WPS.
This example uses the NBG4604 as the AP and NWD210N as the wireless client
which connects to a notebook.
Note: The wireless client must be a WPS-aware device (for example, a WPS USB
adapter or PCI card).
NBG4604 User’s Guide
63
Chapter 6 Tutorials
There are two WPS methods for creating a secure connection. This tutorial shows
you how to do both.
• Push Button Configuration (PBC) - create a secure wireless network simply
by pressing a button. See Section 6.2.1.1 on page 64.This is the easier method.
• PIN Configuration - create a secure wireless network simply by entering a
wireless client's PIN (Personal Identification Number) in the NBG4604’s
interface. See Section 6.2.1.2 on page 65. This is the more secure method,
since one device can authenticate the other.
6.2.1.1 Push Button Configuration (PBC)
1
Make sure that your NBG4604 is turned on and that it is within range of your
computer.
2
Make sure that you have installed the wireless client (this example uses the
NWD210N) driver and utility in your notebook.
3
In the wireless client utility, find the WPS settings. Enable WPS and press the WPS
button (Start or WPS button)
4
Log into NBG4604’s Web Configurator and press the Push Button button in the
Network > Wireless Client > WPS Station screen.
Note: Your NBG4604 has a WPS button located on its panel, as well as a WPS button
in its configuration utility. Both buttons have exactly the same function; you can
use one or the other.
Note: It doesn’t matter which button is pressed first. You must press the second
button within two minutes of pressing the first one.
The NBG4604 sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client. This
may take up to two minutes. Then the wireless client is able to communicate with
the NBG4604 securely.
64
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Tutorials
The following figure shows you an example to set up wireless network and security
by pressing a button on both NBG4604 and wireless client (the NWD210N in this
example).
Figure 30 Example WPS Process: PBC Method
NBG4604
Wireless Client
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
SECURITY INFO
COMMUNICATION
6.2.1.2 PIN Configuration
When you use the PIN configuration method, you need to use both NBG4604’s
configuration interface and the client’s utilities.
1
Launch your wireless client’s configuration utility. Go to the WPS settings and
select the PIN method to get a PIN number.
2
Enter the PIN number to the PIN field in the Network > Wireless LAN > WPS
Station screen on the NBG4604.
3
Click the Start buttons (or button next to the PIN field) on both the wireless client
utility screen and the NBG4604’s WPS Station screen within two minutes.
The NBG4604 authenticates the wireless client and sends the proper configuration
settings to the wireless client. This may take up to two minutes. Then the wireless
client is able to communicate with the NBG4604 securely.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
65
Chapter 6 Tutorials
The following figure shows you the example to set up wireless network and
security on NBG4604 and wireless client (ex. NWD210N in this example) by using
PIN method.
Figure 31 Example WPS Process: PIN Method
Wireless Client
NBG4604
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
Authentication by PIN
SECURITY INFO
COMMUNICATION
66
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Tutorials
6.2.2 Enable and Configure Wireless Security without WPS
on your NBG4604
This example shows you how to configure wireless security settings with the
following parameters on your NBG4604.
SSID
SSID_Example3
Channel
6
Security
WPA-PSK
(Pre-Shared Key: ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey)
Follow the steps below to configure the wireless settings on your NBG4604.
The instructions require that your hardware is connected (see the Quick Start
Guide) and you are logged into the Web Configurator through your LAN connection
(see Section 3.3 on page 28).
1
Open the Wireless LAN > General screen in the NBG4604’s Web Configurator.
2
Make sure the Enable Wireless LAN check box is selected.
3
Enter SSID_Example3 as the SSID and select a channel.
4
Set security mode to WPA-PSK and enter ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey in
the Pre-Shared Key field. Click Apply.
Figure 32 Tutorial: Network > Wireless LAN > General
NBG4604 User’s Guide
67
Chapter 6 Tutorials
5
Open the Status screen. Verify your wireless and wireless security settings under
Device Information and check if the WLAN connection is up under Interface
Status.
Figure 33 Tutorial: Status Screen
6.2.2.1 Configure Your Notebook
Note: We use the ZyXEL M-302 wireless adapter utility screens as an example for the
wireless client. The screens may vary for different models.
68
1
The NBG4604 supports IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g and IEEE 802.11n wireless
clients. Make sure that your notebook or computer’s wireless adapter supports
one of these standards.
2
Wireless adapters come with software sometimes called a “utility” that you install
on your computer. See your wireless adapter’s User’s Guide for information on
how to do that.
3
After you’ve installed the utility, open it. If you cannot see your utility’s icon on
your screen, go to Start > Programs and click on your utility in the list of
programs that appears. The utility displays a list of APs within range, as shown in
the example screen below.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Tutorials
4
Select SSID_Example3 and click Connect.
Figure 34 Connecting a Wireless Client to a Wireless Network t
5
Select WPA-PSK and type the security key in the following screen. Click Next.
Figure 35 Security Settings
6
The Confirm Save window appears. Check your settings and click Save to
continue.
Figure 36 Confirm Save
NBG4604 User’s Guide
69
Chapter 6 Tutorials
7
Check the status of your wireless connection in the screen below. If your wireless
connection is weak or you have no connection, see the Troubleshooting section of
this User’s Guide.
Figure 37 Link Status
If your connection is successful, open your Internet browser and enter http://
www.zyxel.com or the URL of any other web site in the address bar. If you are able
to access the web site, your wireless connection is successfully configured.
6.3 Bandwidth Management for your Network
This section shows you how to configure the bandwidth management feature on
the NBG4604 to limit the bandwidth for specific kinds of outgoing traffic. ZyXEL's
bandwidth management feature allows you to specify bandwidth management
rules based on an application or subnet.
Use the Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced screen to configure
bandwidth management for your network.
6.3.1 Configuring Bandwidth Management by Application
For this example, your company’s customer support department wants to
prioritize VoIP, e-mail and MSN Messenger services.
In the Priority Queue table, VoIP and e-mail services are already pre-defined.
However, you still need to add MSN Messenger in the list (refer to Section 6.3.2 on
page 71).
70
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Tutorials
In the following screen, you set the priorities for VoIP and e-mail.
Figure 38 Tutorial: Priority Queue
Click Enable for the VoIP (SIP) service and set priority to High. Do the same for
E-mail. For the rest of the applications, click Enable if you need these services
and set the priority to Low.
Note: You can also leave the Enable field blank for the rest of the applications. In
doing so, the NBG4604 does not apply bandwidth management to these
services.
6.3.2 Configuring Bandwidth Management by Custom
Application
Aside from the VOIP and e-mail services, you need to set the priority for MSN
Messenger. To do this, add the service in the Priority Queue table of the
Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced screen.
Figure 39 Tutorial: Adding MSN Messenger to Priority Queue
NBG4604 User’s Guide
71
Chapter 6 Tutorials
To add the MSN Messenger service in the Priority Queue:
1
Click Enable in one of the fields for additional services.
2
Add MSN as the service name.
3
Set the priority for this to High.
4
For the port, choose TCP from the drop-down menu and enter 1863 in the
Specific Port field.
Your priority table should now have the VoIP, E-mail and MSN Messenger
services priorities set to High.
6.3.3 Configuring Bandwidth Allocation by IP or IP Range
For this example, your company’s 20th anniversary is coming up. You want to use
the multimedia room’s Internet connection to upload some videos to the website.
You also use this room for video conferences, radio broadcasts, live video
streaming, and so on throughout the day. While these media-heavy activities are
going on, you still want to keep uploading the videos in the background. As such,
you want to dedicate the minimum amount of bandwidth for this traffic.
You know the following:
• Multimedia room’s LAN IP range: 192.168.1.1 to 192.168.1.34
• IP Address of the computer uploading through FTP: 192.168.1.34
• Services you want to configure:
REAL AUDIO
TCP 7070
RTSP
TCP or UDP 554
VDO LIVE
TCP 7000
FTP
TCP 20 ~ 21
Click the Edit icon in Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced to open
the following screen.
Figure 40 Tutorial: Bandwidth Allocation Example
72
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Tutorials
Enter the following values for each service you want to add. For this tutorial, you
need to add each of the following service (see table below) and click Apply.
Table 22 Services and Values
SERVICES
FIELDS
REAL AUDIO
RTSP
VDO LIVE
FTP
Active
Check this to turn on this bandwidth management rule.
Direction
Select Both applies bandwidth management to traffic
that the NBG4604 forwards to both the LAN and the
WAN.
Select To WAN
LAN IP
Range
Enter 192.168.1.1 ~ 192.168.1.33.
Enter
192.168.1.34
Protocol
TCP
TCP or UDP
TCP
TCP
Port Range
7070
554
7000
20 ~ 21
Policy
Min
Max
Rate
Select 30M as the minimum bandwidth allowed.
Select 64K
Apply
Click this to add the rule to the Bandwidth Allocation table.
After adding these services, go to Management > Bandwidth MGMT >
Advanced and check if you have the correct values.
Figure 41 Tutorial: Bandwidth Allocation Example
Note: The Policy column displays either Max (maximum) or Min (minimum). This is
directly directed to the value in the Rate column. For example, you selected
Min and entered 30M as the rate for the VoIP service. The NBG4604 allocates
at least 30 megabytes for the VoIP service.
Refer to Appedix F on page 261 for a list of common services that you can add in
the Bandwidth Mgnt screen.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
73
Chapter 6 Tutorials
74
NBG4604 User’s Guide
P ART II
Technical Reference
75
76
CHAPTER
7
Wireless LAN
7.1 Overview
This chapter discusses how to configure the wireless network settings in your
NBG4604. See the appendices for more detailed information about wireless
networks.
The following figure provides an example of a wireless network.
Figure 42 Example of a Wireless Network
The wireless network is the part in the blue circle. In this wireless network,
devices A and B are called wireless clients. The wireless clients use the access
point (AP) to interact with other devices (such as the printer) or with the Internet.
Your NBG4604 is the AP.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
77
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
7.2 What You Can Do
• Use the General screen (Section 7.4 on page 81) to enable the Wireless LAN,
enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode.
• Use the MAC Filter screen (Section 7.5 on page 87) to allow or deny wireless
stations based on their MAC addresses from connecting to the NBG4604.
• Use the Advanced screen (Section 7.6 on page 89) to allow intra-BSS
networking and set the RTS/CTS Threshold.
• Use the QoS screen (Section 7.7 on page 90) to ensure Quality of Service (QoS)
in your wireless network.
• Use the WPS screen (Section 7.8 on page 93) to quickly set up a wireless
network with strong security, without having to configure security settings
manually.
• Use the WPS Station screen (Section 7.9 on page 94) to add a wireless station
using WPS.
• Use the Scheduling screen (Section 7.10 on page 95) to set the times your
wireless LAN is turned on and off.
• Use the WDS screen (Section 7.11 on page 96) to set the operating mode of
your NBG4604 to AP + Bridge or Bridge Only and establish wireless links with
other APs.
7.3 What You Should Know
Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines.
• Every wireless client in the same wireless network must use the same SSID.
The SSID is the name of the wireless network. It stands for Service Set IDentity.
• If two wireless networks overlap, they should use different channels.
Like radio stations or television channels, each wireless network uses a specific
channel, or frequency, to send and receive information.
• Every wireless client in the same wireless network must use security compatible
with the AP.
Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network. It can also
protect the information that is sent in the wireless network.
7.3.1 Wireless Security Overview
The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up
in the wireless network.
78
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
7.3.1.1 SSID
Normally, the AP acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area.
You can hide the SSID instead, in which case the AP does not broadcast the SSID.
In addition, you should change the default SSID to something that is difficult to
guess.
This type of security is fairly weak, however, because there are ways for
unauthorized devices to get the SSID. In addition, unauthorized devices can still
see the information that is sent in the wireless network.
7.3.1.2 MAC Address Filter
Every wireless client has a unique identification number, called a MAC address.1 A
MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal characters2; for
example, 00A0C5000002 or 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. To get the MAC address for each
wireless client, see the appropriate User’s Guide or other documentation.
You can use the MAC address filter to tell the AP which wireless clients are allowed
or not allowed to use the wireless network. If a wireless client is allowed to use the
wireless network, it still has to have the correct settings (SSID, channel, and
security). If a wireless client is not allowed to use the wireless network, it does not
matter if it has the correct settings.
This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless
network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized devices to get the MAC
address of an authorized wireless client. Then, they can use that MAC address to
use the wireless network.
7.3.1.3 User Authentication
You can make every user log in to the wireless network before they can use it.
This is called user authentication. However, every wireless client in the wireless
network has to support IEEE 802.1x to do this.
For wireless networks, there are two typical places to store the user names and
passwords for each user.
• In the AP: this feature is called a local user database or a local database.
• In a RADIUS server: this is a server used in businesses more than in homes.
If your AP does not provide a local user database and if you do not have a RADIUS
server, you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users.
1.
Some wireless devices, such as scanners, can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks.
These kinds of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses.
2.
Hexadecimal characters are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
79
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
Unauthorized devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless
network, even if they cannot use the wireless network. Furthermore, there are
ways for unauthorized wireless users to get a valid user name and password.
Then, they can use that user name and password to use the wireless network.
Local user databases also have an additional limitation that is explained in the
next section.
7.3.1.4 Encryption
Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the
wireless network. Encryption is like a secret code. If you do not know the secret
code, you cannot understand the message.
The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of user
authentication. (See Section 7.3.1.3 on page 79 for information about this.)
Table 23 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication
NO AUTHENTICATION RADIUS SERVER
Weakest
No Security
WPA
Static WEP
WPA-PSK
Strongest
WPA2-PSK
WPA2
For example if the wireless network has a RADIUS server, you can choose WPA or
WPA2. If users do not log in to the wireless network, you can choose no
encryption, Static WEP, WPA-PSK, or WPA2-PSK.
Usually, you should set up the strongest encryption that every wireless client in
the wireless network supports. For example, suppose the AP does not have a local
user database, and you do not have a RADIUS server. Therefore, there is no user
authentication. Suppose the wireless network has two wireless clients. Device A
only supports WEP, and device B supports WEP and WPA. Therefore, you should
set up Static WEP in the wireless network.
Note: It is recommended that wireless networks use WPA-PSK, WPA, or stronger
encryption. IEEE 802.1x and WEP encryption are better than none at all, but it
is still possible for unauthorized devices to figure out the original information
pretty quickly.
Note: It is not possible to use WPA-PSK, WPA or stronger encryption with a local user
database. In this case, it is better to set up stronger encryption with no
authentication than to set up weaker encryption with the local user database.
When you select WPA2 or WPA2-PSK in your NBG4604, you can also select an
option (WPA Compatible) to support WPA as well. In this case, if some wireless
clients support WPA and some support WPA2, you should set up WPA2-PSK or
80
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
WPA2 (depending on the type of wireless network login) and select the WPA
Compatible option in the NBG4604.
Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless
network. The longer the key, the stronger the encryption. Every wireless client in
the wireless network must have the same key.
7.3.1.5 WPS
WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) is an industry standard specification, defined by the
WiFi Alliance. WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong
security, without having to configure security settings manually. Depending on the
devices in your network, you can either press a button (on the device itself, or in
its configuration utility) or enter a PIN (Personal Identification Number) in the
devices. Then, they connect and set up a secure network by themselves. See how
to set up a secure wireless network using WPS in the Section 6.2.1 on page 63.
7.4 General Wireless LAN Screen
Use this screen to enable the Wireless LAN, enter the SSID and select the wireless
security mode.
Note: If you are configuring the NBG4604 from a computer connected to the wireless
LAN and you change the NBG4604’s SSID, channel or security settings, you
will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm. You must
then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the NBG4604’s
new settings.
Click Network > Wireless LAN to open the General screen.
Figure 43 Network > Wireless LAN > General
NBG4604 User’s Guide
81
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
The following table describes the general wireless LAN labels in this screen.
Table 24 Network > Wireless LAN > General
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Enable
Wireless LAN
Click the check box to activate wireless LAN.
Enable
Wireless LAN
#1
Set the number of wireless LANs to enable on this device, up to a
maximum of 4.
Name(SSID)
(Service Set IDentity) The SSID identifies the Service Set with which a
wireless station is associated. Wireless stations associating to the access
point (AP) must have the same SSID. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32
printable 7-bit ASCII characters) for the wireless LAN.
There is one Name(SSID) field for each wireless LAN enabled on this
device.
Channel
Selection
Set the operating frequency/channel depending on your particular region.
Select a channel from the drop-down list box. The options vary depending
on the frequency band and the country you are in.
Refer to the Connection Wizard chapter for more information on channels.
This option is only available if Auto Channel Selection is disabled.
Auto Channel
Selection
Select this check box for the NBG4604 to automatically choose the
channel with the least interference. Deselect this check box if you wish to
manually select the channel using the Channel Section field.
Operating
Channel
This displays the channel the NBG4604 is currently using.
Channel
Width
Select whether the NBG4604 uses a wireless channel width of 20 or 40
MHz. A standard 20 MHz channel offers transfer speeds of up to 150Mbps
whereas a 40MHz channel uses two standard channels and offers speeds
of up to 300 Mbps. Because not all devices support 40 MHz channels,
select Auto 20/40MHz to allow the NBG4604 to adjust the channel
bandwidth automatically.
SSID
Selection
Select a wireless LAN for which to configure security settings.
Enable Hide
SSID
Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a
station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool.
Enable IntraBSS Traffic
A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between
wireless clients or between a wireless client and a wired network client go
through one access point (AP).
The security settings only apply to the selected wireless LAN.
Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS. When IntraBSS is enabled, wireless client A and B can access the wired network and
communicate with each other. When Intra-BSS is disabled, wireless client
A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with
each other.
82
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
Table 24 Network > Wireless LAN > General
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Security
Mode
Select No Security, Static WEP, WPA-PSK, or WPA2-PSK to add
security on this wireless network. The wireless clients which want to
associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as
this device. After you select to use a security, additional options appears
in this screen. See 7.4.2 and 7.4.3 sections. Or you can select No
Security to allow any client to associate this network without
authentication.
Note: If you enable the WPS function, only No Security, WPA-PSK
and WPA2-PSK are available in this field.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604.
Reset
Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen.
See the rest of this chapter for information on the other labels in this screen.
7.4.1 No Security
Select No Security to allow wireless stations to communicate with the access
points without any data encryption.
Note: If you do not enable any wireless security on your NBG4604, your network is
accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range.
Figure 44 Network > Wireless LAN > General: No Security
NBG4604 User’s Guide
83
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 25 Network > Wireless LAN > General: No Security
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Security
Mode
Choose No Security from the drop-down list box.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604.
Reset
Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen.
7.4.2 WEP Encryption
WEP encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless stations and
the access points to keep network communications private. It encrypts unicast
and multicast communications in a network. Both the wireless stations and the
access points must use the same WEP key.
Your NBG4604 allows you to configure up to four 64-bit or 128-bit WEP keys but
only one key can be enabled at any one time.
84
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
In order to configure and enable WEP encryption; click Network > Wireless LAN
to display the General screen. Select Static WEP from the Security Mode list.
Figure 45 Network > Wireless LAN > General: Static WEP
The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen.
Table 26 Network > Wireless LAN > General: Static WEP
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
WEP Encryption
Select 64-bit WEP or 128-bit WEP to enable data encryption.
Authentication
Method
This field is activated when you select 64-bit WEP or 128-bit WEP in
the WEP Encryption field.
Select Auto, Open System or Shared Key from the drop-down list
box.
This field specifies whether the wireless clients have to provide the
WEP key to login to the wireless client. Keep this setting at Auto or
Open System unless you want to force a key verification before
communication between the wireless client and the ZyXEL Device
occurs. Select Shared Key to force the clients to provide the WEP key
prior to communication.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
85
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
Table 26 Network > Wireless LAN > General: Static WEP
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
ASCII
Select this option in order to enter ASCII characters as WEP key.
Hex
Select this option in order to enter hexadecimal characters as a WEP
key.
The preceding "0x", that identifies a hexadecimal key, is entered
automatically.
Key 1 to Key 4
The WEP keys are used to encrypt data. Both the NBG4604 and the
wireless stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission.
If you chose 64-bit WEP, then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10
hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F").
If you chose 128-bit WEP, then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26
hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F").
You must configure at least one key, only one key can be activated at
any one time. The default key is key 1.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604.
Reset
Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen.
7.4.3 WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK
Click Network > Wireless LAN to display the General screen. Select WPA-PSK
or WPA2-PSK from the Security Mode list.
Figure 46 Network > Wireless LAN > General: WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK
86
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 27 Network > Wireless LAN > General: WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
WPA
Compatible
This check box is available only when you select WPA2-PSK in the
Security Mode field.
Select the check box to have both WPA2 and WPA wireless clients be
able to communicate with the NBG4604 even when the NBG4604 is
using WPA2-PSK.
Pre-Shared Key
WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK uses a simple common password for
authentication.
Type a pre-shared key from 8 to 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters
(including spaces and symbols).
Type a pre-shared key less than 64 case-sensitive HEX characters ("09", "A-F").
Group Key
Update Timer
The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the AP (if using
WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK key management) or RADIUS server (if using
WPA/WPA2 key management) sends a new group key out to all
clients. The re-keying process is the WPA/WPA2 equivalent of
automatically changing the WEP key for an AP and all stations in a
WLAN on a periodic basis. Setting of the Group Key Update Timer is
also supported in WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK mode. The default is 600
seconds (10 minutes).
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604.
Reset
Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen.
7.5 MAC Filter
The MAC filter screen allows you to configure the NBG4604 to give exclusive
access to up to 16 devices (Allow) or exclude up to 16 devices from accessing the
NBG4604 (Deny). Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control)
address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of
hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You need to know the
MAC address of the devices to configure this screen.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
87
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
To change your NBG4604’s MAC filter settings, click Network > Wireless LAN >
MAC Filter. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 47 Network > Wireless LAN > MAC Filter
The following table describes the labels in this menu.
Table 28 Network > Wireless LAN > MAC Filter
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Active
Select Yes from the drop down list box to enable MAC address filtering.
Filter Action
Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the MAC Address
table.
Select Deny to block access to the NBG4604, MAC addresses not listed will
be allowed to access the NBG4604
Select Allow to permit access to the NBG4604, MAC addresses not listed
will be denied access to the NBG4604.
88
Set
This is the index number of the MAC address.
MAC
Address
Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless station that are allowed or denied
access to the NBG4604 in these address fields. Enter the MAC addresses in
a valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal character pairs, for
example, 12:34:56:78:9a:bc.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604.
Reset
Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
7.6 Wireless LAN Advanced Screen
Use this screen to allow intra-BSS networking and set the RTS/CTS Threshold.
Click Network > Wireless LAN > Advanced. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 48 Network > Wireless LAN > Advanced
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 29 Network > Wireless LAN > Advanced
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Wireless Advanced Setup
RTS/CTS
Threshold
Data with its frame size larger than this value will perform the RTS
(Request To Send)/CTS (Clear To Send) handshake.
Enter a value between 0 and 2432.
Fragmentatio
n Threshold
The threshold (number of bytes) for the fragmentation boundary for
directed messages. It is the maximum data fragment size that can be
sent. Enter an even number between 256 and 2346.
This field is not available when Super Mode is selected.
Beacon
Interval
When a wirelessly networked device sends a beacon, it includes with it a
beacon interval. This specifies the time period before the device sends the
beacon again. The interval tells receiving devices on the network how long
they can wait in low-power mode before waking up to handle the beacon.
This value can be set from 20ms to 1000ms. A high value helps save
current consumption of the access point.
DTIM
Delivery Traffic Indication Message (DTIM) is the time period after which
broadcast and multicast packets are transmitted to mobile clients in the
Active Power Management mode. A high DTIM value can cause clients to
lose connectivity with the network. This value can be set from 1 to 100.
Preamble
A preamble affects the timing in your wireless network. There are two
preamble modes: long and short. If a device uses a different preamble
mode than the NBG4604 does, it cannot communicate with the NBG4604.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
89
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
Table 29 Network > Wireless LAN > Advanced
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
CTS
Protection
When set to None, the NBG4604 protects wireless communication against
interference.
When set to Always, the NBG4604 improves performance within mixed
wireless modes.
Select Auto to let the NBG4604 determine whether to turn this feature on
or off in the current environment.
Tx Power
This field controls the transmission power of the NBG4604. When using
the NBG4604 with a notebook computer, select a lower transmission
power level when you are close to the AP in order to conserve battery
power.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604.
Reset
Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen.
7.7 Quality of Service (QoS) Screen
The QoS screen allows you to automatically give a service (such as e-mail, VoIP or
FTP) a priority level.
Click Network > Wireless LAN > QoS. The following screen appears.
Figure 49 Network > Wireless LAN > QoS
90
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 30 Network > Wireless LAN > QoS
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
WMM QoS Policy
Select Default to have the NBG4604 automatically give a service a
priority level according to the ToS value in the IP header of packets
it sends. WMM QoS (Wifi MultiMedia Quality of Service) gives high
priority to voice and video, which makes them run more smoothly.
Select Application Priority from the drop-down list box to display
a table of application names, services, ports and priorities to which
you want to apply WMM QoS.
The table appears only if you select Application Priority in WMM
QoS Policy.
#
This is the number of an individual application entry.
Name
This field displays a description given to an application entry.
Service
This field displays either FTP, WWW, E-mail or a User Defined
service to which you want to apply WMM QoS.
Dest Port
This field displays the destination port number to which the
application sends traffic.
Priority
This field displays the priority of the application.
Highest - Typically used for voice or video that should be highquality.
High - Typically used for voice or video that can be medium-quality.
Mid - Typically used for applications that do not fit into another
priority. For example, Internet surfing.
Low - Typically used for non-critical “background” applications,
such as large file transfers and print jobs that should not affect
other applications.
Modify
Click the Edit icon to open the Application Priority
Configuration screen. Modify an existing application entry or
create a application entry in the Application Priority
Configuration screen.
Click the Remove icon to delete an application entry.
Apply
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Click Apply to save your changes to the NBG4604.
91
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
7.7.1 Application Priority Configuration
Use this screen to edit a WMM QoS application entry. Click the edit icon under
Modify. The following screen displays.
Figure 50 Network > Wireless LAN > QoS: Application Priority Configuration
See Appendix E on page 261 for a list of commonly-used services and destination
ports. The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 31 Network > Wireless LAN > QoS: Application Priority Configuration
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Name
Type a description of the application priority.
Service
The following is a description of the applications you can prioritize
with WMM QoS. Select a service from the drop-down list box.
• E-Mail
Electronic mail consists of messages sent through a computer
network to specific groups or individuals. Here are some default
ports for e-mail:
POP3 - port 110
IMAP - port 143
SMTP - port 25
HTTP - port 80
• FTP
File Transfer Protocol enables fast transfer of files, including large
files that it may not be possible to send via e-mail. FTP uses port
number 21.
• WWW
The World Wide Web is an Internet system to distribute graphical,
hyper-linked information, based on Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
(HTTP) - a client/server protocol for the World Wide Web. The Web is
not synonymous with the Internet; rather, it is just one service on
the Internet. Other services on the Internet include Internet Relay
Chat and Newsgroups. The Web is accessed through use of a
browser.
• User-Defined
User-defined services are user specific services configured using
known ports and applications.
92
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
Table 31 Network > Wireless LAN > QoS: Application Priority Configuration
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Dest Port
This displays the port the selected service uses. Type a port number
in the field provided if you want to use a different port to the default
port.
Priority
Select a priority from the drop-down list box.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604.
Cancel
Click Cancel to return to the previous screen.
7.8 WPS Screen
Use this screen to enable/disable WPS, view or generate a new PIN number and
check current WPS status. To open this screen, click Network > Wireless LAN >
WPS tab.
Figure 51 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 32 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
WPS Setup
Enable WPS
Select this to enable the WPS feature.
PIN Number
This displays a PIN number last time system generated. Click Generate
to generate a new PIN number.
WPS Status
NBG4604 User’s Guide
93
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
Table 32 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Status
This displays Configured when the NBG4604 has connected to a
wireless network using WPS or when Enable WPS is selected and
wireless or wireless security settings have been changed. The current
wireless and wireless security settings also appear in the screen.
This displays Unconfigured if WPS is disabled and there are no
wireless or wireless security changes on the NBG4604 or you click
Release_Configuration to remove the configured wireless and
wireless security settings.
Release
Configuration
This button is only available when the WPS status displays Configured.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604.
Refresh
Click Refresh to get this screen information afresh.
Click this button to remove all configured wireless and wireless security
settings for WPS connections on the NBG4604.
7.9 WPS Station Screen
Use this screen when you want to add a wireless station using WPS. To open this
screen, click Network > Wireless LAN > WPS Station tab.
Note: Note: After you click Push Button on this screen, you have to press a similar
button in the wireless station utility within 2 minutes. To add the second wireless
station, you have to press these buttons on both device and the wireless station
again after the first 2 minutes.
Figure 52 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS Station
94
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 33 Network > Wireless LAN > WPS Station
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Push Button
Use this button when you use the PBC (Push Button Configuration)
method to configure wireless stations’s wireless settings.
Click this to start WPS-aware wireless station scanning and the wireless
security information synchronization.
Or input
station’s PIN
number
Use this button when you use the PIN Configuration method to
configure wireless station’s wireless settings.
Type the same PIN number generated in the wireless station’s utility.
Then click Start to associate to each other and perform the wireless
security information synchronization.
7.10 Scheduling Screen
Use this screen to set the times your wireless LAN is turned on and off. Wireless
LAN scheduling is disabled by default. The wireless LAN can be scheduled to turn
on or off on certain days and at certain times. To open this screen, click Network
> Wireless LAN > Scheduling tab.
Figure 53 Network > Wireless LAN > Scheduling
NBG4604 User’s Guide
95
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 34 Network > Wireless LAN > Scheduling
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Enable Wireless
LAN Scheduling
Select this to enable Wireless LAN scheduling.
Action
Select On or Off to specify whether the Wireless LAN is turned on or off.
This field works in conjunction with the Day and Except for the
following times fields.
Day
Select Everyday or the specific days to turn the Wireless LAN on or off.
If you select Everyday you can not select any specific days. This field
works in conjunction with the Except for the following times field.
Except for the
following times
(24-Hour
Format)
Select a begin time using the first set of hour and minute (min) drop
down boxes and select an end time using the second set of hour and
minute (min) drop down boxes. If you have chosen On earlier for the
WLAN Status the Wireless LAN will turn off between the two times you
enter in these fields. If you have chosen Off earlier for the WLAN Status
the Wireless LAN will turn on between the two times you enter in these
fields.
Note: Entering the same begin time and end time will mean the
whole day.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604.
Reset
Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen.
7.11 WDS Screen
A Wireless Distribution System is a wireless connection between two or more APs.
Use this screen to set the operating mode of your NBG4604 to AP + Bridge or
Bridge Only and establish wireless links with other APs. You need to know the
MAC address of the peer device, which also must be in bridge mode.
Note: You must enable the same wireless security settings on the NBG4604 and on
all wireless clients that you want to associate with it.
96
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
Click Network > Wireless LAN > WDS tab. The following screen opens with the
Basic Setting set to Disabled, and Security Mode set to No Security.
Figure 54 Network > Wireless LAN > WDS
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 35 Network > Wireless LAN > WDS
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
WDS Setup
Basic Settings
Select the operating mode for your NBG4604.
•
•
AP + Bridge - The NBG4604 functions as a bridge and access point
simultaneously.
Bridge - The NBG4604 acts as a wireless network bridge and
establishes wireless links with other APs. You need to know the MAC
address of the peer device, which also must be in bridge mode. The
NBG4604 can establish up to five wireless links with other APs.
Select Disable if you do not want to use this feature.
Local MAC
Address
This is the MAC address of your NBG4604.
Phy Mode
Select a WDS physical layer transceiver mode.
Remote MAC
Address
This is the MAC address of the peer device that your NBG4604 wants to
make a bridge connection with.
You can connect to up to 4 peer devices.
Security
Security Mode
Note: WDS security is independent of the security settings
between the NBG4604 and any wireless clients.
The WDS is set to No Security by default.
•
•
Refer to Section 7.11.1 on page 98 to view the screen for Static
WEP security.
Refer to Section 7.11.2 on page 99 to view the screen for WPA2PSK security.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes to NBG4604.
Refresh
Click Refresh to reload the previous configuration for this screen.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
97
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
7.11.1 Security Mode: Static WEP
Use this screen to configure the Static WEP security for your NBG4604 when it is
in AP + Bridge or Bridge Only mode.
Figure 55 Network > Wireless LAN > WDS (Static WEP)
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Table 35 on page
97 for descriptions of other fields in this screen.
Table 36 Network > Wireless LAN > WDS (Static WEP)
98
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
WEP Encryption
Select 64-bit WEP or 128-bit WEP to enable data encryption.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
Table 36 Network > Wireless LAN > WDS (Static WEP)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Authentication
Method
There are two types of WEP authentication namely, Open System and
Shared Key.
Open system is implemented for ease-of-use and when security is not
an issue. The wireless station and the AP or peer computer do not share
a secret key. Thus the wireless stations can associate with any AP or
peer computer and listen to any transmitted data that is not encrypted.
Shared key mode involves a shared secret key to authenticate the
wireless station to the AP or peer computer. This requires you to enable
the wireless LAN security and use same settings on both the wireless
station and the AP or peer computer.
•
•
ASCII/HEX
Keys 1 to 4t
Select Shared Key to have the NBG4604 authenticate only those
wireless clients that use Shared Key mode and have the correct WEP
key.
Select Auto to have the NBG4604 allow association with wireless
clients that use Open System mode. Data transfer is encrypted as
long as the wireless client has the correct WEP key for encryption.
The NBG4604 authenticates wireless clients using Shared Key mode
that have the correct WEP key.
The WEP keys are used to encrypt data. Both the NBG4604 and the
wireless stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission.
If you chose 64-bit WEP, then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10
hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F").
If you chose 128-bit WEP, then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26
hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F").
You must configure all four keys, but only one key can be activated at
any one time. The default key is key 1.
7.11.2 Security Mode: WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK
Use this screen to configure the WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK security for your
NBG4604 when it is in AP + Bridge or Bridge Only mode.
Figure 56 Network > Wireless LAN > WDS (WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK)
NBG4604 User’s Guide
99
Chapter 7 Wireless LAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen. Refer to Table 35 on page
97 for descriptions of other fields in this screen.
Table 37 Network > Wireless LAN > WDS (WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK)
100
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Pre-Shared Key
Type a pre-shared key from 8 to 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters
(including spaces and symbols).
NBG4604 User’s Guide
CHAPTER
8
WAN
8.1 Overview
This chapter discusses the NBG4604’s WAN screens. Use these screens to
configure your NBG4604 for Internet access.
A WAN (Wide Area Network) connection is an outside connection to another
network or the Internet. It connects your private networks (such as a LAN (Local
Area Network) and other networks, so that a computer in one location can
communicate with computers in other locations.
Figure 57 LAN and WAN
See the chapter about the connection wizard for more information on the fields in
the WAN screens.
8.2 What You Can Do
• Use the Internet Connection screen (Section 8.4 on page 105) to enter your
ISP information and set how the computer acquires its IP, DNS and WAN MAC
addresses.
• Use the Advanced screen (Section 8.5 on page 111) to enable multicasting,
configure Windows networking and bridge.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
101
Chapter 8 WAN
8.3 What You Need To Know
The information in this section can help you configure the screens for your WAN
connection, as well as enable/disable some advanced features of your NBG4604.
8.3.1 Configuring Your Internet Connection
Encapsulation Method
Encapsulation is used to include data from an upper layer protocol into a lower
layer protocol. To set up a WAN connection to the Internet, you need to use the
same encapsulation method used by your ISP (Internet Service Provider). If your
ISP offers a dial-up Internet connection using PPPoE (PPP over Ethernet) or PPTP
(Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol), they should also provide a username and
password (and service name) for user authentication.
WAN IP Address
The WAN IP address is an IP address for the NBG4604, which makes it accessible
from an outside network. It is used by the NBG4604 to communicate with other
devices in other networks. It can be static (fixed) or dynamically assigned by the
ISP each time the NBG4604 tries to access the Internet.
If your ISP assigns you a static WAN IP address, they should also assign you the
subnet mask and DNS server IP address(es) (and a gateway IP address if you use
the Ethernet or ENET ENCAP encapsulation method).
DNS Server Address Assignment
Use Domain Name System (DNS) to map a domain name to its corresponding IP
address and vice versa, for instance, the IP address of www.zyxel.com is
204.217.0.2. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must
know the IP address of a computer before you can access it.
The NBG4604 can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways.
102
1
The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information
sheet, when you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, manually
enter them in the DNS server fields.
2
If your ISP dynamically assigns the DNS server IP addresses (along with the
NBG4604’s WAN IP address), set the DNS server fields to get the DNS server
address from the ISP.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 8 WAN
WAN MAC Address
The MAC address screen allows users to configure the WAN port's MAC address by
either using the factory default or cloning the MAC address from a computer on
your LAN. Choose Factory Default to select the factory assigned default MAC
Address.
Otherwise, click Clone the computer's MAC address - IP Address and enter
the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning. Once it is
successfully configured, the address will be copied to configuration file. It is
recommended that you clone the MAC address prior to hooking up the WAN Port.
8.3.2 Multicast
Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1
sender - 1 recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network).
Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network - not everybody
and not just 1.
Figure 58 Multicast Example
In the multicast example above, systems A and D comprise one multicast group.
In multicasting, the server only needs to send one data stream and this is
delivered to systems A and D.
IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to
establish membership in a multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. The
NBG4604 supports both IGMP version 1 (IGMP-v1) and IGMP version 2 (IGMPv2).
At start up, the NBG4604 queries all directly connected networks to gather group
membership. After that, the NBG4604 periodically updates this information. IP
multicasting can be enabled/disabled on the NBG4604 LAN and/or WAN interfaces
in the Web Configurator (LAN; WAN). Select None to disable IP multicasting on
these interfaces.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
103
Chapter 8 WAN
8.3.3 NetBIOS over TCP/IP
NetBIOS (Network Basic Input/Output System) are TCP or UDP broadcast packets
that enable a computer to connect to and communicate with a LAN. For some dialup services such as PPPoE or PPTP, NetBIOS packets cause unwanted calls.
However it may sometimes be necessary to allow NetBIOS packets to pass
through to the WAN in order to find a computer on the WAN.
8.3.4 Auto-Bridge
In the rear panel of your NBG4604, you can see four LAN ports (1 to 4) and one
WAN port. The WAN port is for your Internet access connection, and the LAN ports
are for your network devices. The WAN port has a different IP address from the
LAN ports.
When you enable auto-bridging in your NBG4604, all five ports (4 LAN ports and
the WAN port) share the same IP address as shown in the figure below.
Figure 59 Autobridging Example
IP Address: 192.168.1.20
This might happen if you put the NBG4604 behind a NAT router that assigns it this
IP address. When the NBG4604 is in auto-bridge mode, the NBG4604 acts as an
AP and all the interfaces (LAN, WAN and WLAN) are bridged. In this mode, your
NAT, DHCP server and firewall on the NBG4604 are not available. You do not have
to reconfigure them if you return to router mode.
Auto-bridging only works under the following conditions:
• The WAN IP must be 192.168.x.y (where x and y must be from zero to nine). If
the LAN IP address and the WAN IP address are in the same subnet but x or y
is greater than nine, the device operates in router mode (with firewall
available).
• The device must be in Router Mode (see Chapter 22 on page 195 for more
information) for auto-bridging to become active.
104
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 8 WAN
8.4 Internet Connection
Use this screen to change your NBG4604’s Internet access settings. Click
Network > WAN. The screen differs according to the encapsulation you choose.
8.4.1 Ethernet Encapsulation
This screen displays when you select Ethernet encapsulation.
Figure 60 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: Ethernet Encapsulation
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 38 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: Ethernet Encapsulation
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Connection Type You must choose the Ethernet option when the WAN port is used as a
regular Ethernet.
WAN IP Address Assignment
Get
automatically
from ISP
Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. This
is the default selection.
Use Fixed IP
Address
Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
105
Chapter 8 WAN
Table 38 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: Ethernet Encapsulation
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
IP Address
Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fixed IP
Address.
IP Subnet
Mask
Enter the IP Subnet Mask in this field.
Gateway IP
Address
Enter a Gateway IP Address (if your ISP gave you one) in this field.
DNS Servers
First DNS Server Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server
information (and the NBG4604's WAN IP address). The field to the right
Second DNS
displays the (read-only) DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns.
Server
Select User-Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter
the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. If you chose UserDefined, but leave the IP address set to 0.0.0.0, User-Defined
changes to None after you click Apply. If you set a second choice to
User-Defined, and enter the same IP address, the second UserDefined changes to None after you click Apply.
Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not
configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in
order to access it.
WAN MAC
Address
The MAC address section allows users to configure the WAN port's MAC
address by either using the NBG4604’s MAC address, copying the MAC
address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC
address.
Factory default
Select Factory default to use the factory assigned default MAC
Address.
Clone the
computer’s MAC
address - IP
Address
Select Clone the computer's MAC address - IP Address and enter
the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning.
Once it is successfully configured, the address will be copied to the rom
file. It will not change unless you change the setting or upload a
different ROM file.
Set WAN MAC
Address
Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604.
Reset
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
8.4.2 PPPoE Encapsulation
The NBG4604 supports PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet). PPPoE is an
IETF standard (RFC 2516) specifying how a personal computer (PC) interacts with
a broadband modem (DSL, cable, wireless, etc.) connection. The PPP over
Ethernet option is for a dial-up connection using PPPoE.
For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that
works with existing access control systems (for example Radius).
106
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 8 WAN
One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network
services, a function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service
provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals.
Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier, as
it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site.
By implementing PPPoE directly on the NBG4604 (rather than individual
computers), the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed,
since the NBG4604 does that part of the task. Furthermore, with NAT, all of the
LANs’ computers will have access.
This screen displays when you select PPPoE encapsulation.
Figure 61 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPPoE Encapsulation
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 39 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPPoE Encapsulation
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
ISP Parameters for Internet Access
Connection
Type
Select PPP over Ethernet if you connect to your Internet via dial-up.
Service Name
Type the PPPoE service name provided to you. PPPoE uses a service
name to identify and reach the PPPoE server.
User Name
Type the user name given to you by your ISP.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
107
Chapter 8 WAN
Table 39 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPPoE Encapsulation
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Password
Type the password associated with the user name above.
Retype to
Confirm
Type your password again to make sure that you have entered is
correctly.
Nailed-Up
Connection
Select Nailed-Up Connection if you do not want the connection to time
out.
Idle Timeout
This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the router
automatically disconnects from the PPPoE server.
DNS Servers
First DNS
Server
Second DNS
Server
Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information
(and the NBG4604's WAN IP address). The field to the right displays the
(read-only) DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns.
Select User-Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter
the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. If you chose UserDefined, but leave the IP address set to 0.0.0.0, User-Defined
changes to None after you click Apply. If you set a second choice to
User-Defined, and enter the same IP address, the second UserDefined changes to None after you click Apply.
Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not
configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in
order to access it.
WAN MAC
Address
The MAC address section allows users to configure the WAN port's MAC
address by using the NBG4604’s MAC address, copying the MAC address
from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address.
Factory default
Select Factory default to use the factory assigned default MAC
Address.
Clone the
computer’s
MAC address IP Address
Select Clone the computer's MAC address - IP Address and enter
the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning.
Once it is successfully configured, the address will be copied to the rom
file. It will not change unless you change the setting or upload a
different ROM file.
Set WAN MAC
Address
Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604.
Reset
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
8.4.3 PPTP Encapsulation
Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) is a network protocol that enables secure
transfer of data from a remote client to a private server, creating a Virtual Private
Network (VPN) using TCP/IP-based networks.
PPTP supports on-demand, multi-protocol and virtual private networking over
public networks, such as the Internet.
108
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 8 WAN
This screen displays when you select PPTP encapsulation.
Figure 62 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPTP Encapsulation
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 40 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPTP Encapsulation
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
ISP Parameters for Internet Access
Connection Type
Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) is a network protocol that
enables secure transfer of data from a remote client to a private
server, creating a Virtual Private Network (VPN) using TCP/IP-based
networks. PPTP supports on-demand, multi-protocol, and virtual
private networking over public networks, such as the Internet. The
NBG4604 supports only one PPTP server connection at any given
time.
To configure a PPTP client, you must configure the User Name and
Password fields for a PPP connection and the PPTP parameters for
a PPTP connection.
User Name
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Type the user name given to you by your ISP.
109
Chapter 8 WAN
Table 40 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPTP Encapsulation
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Password
Type the password associated with the User Name above.
Retype to Confirm
Type your password again to make sure that you have entered is
correctly.
Nailed-up
Connection
Select Nailed-Up Connection if you do not want the connection to
time out.
Idle Timeout
This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the
NBG4604 automatically disconnects from the PPTP server.
PPTP Configuration
Server IP Address/
Domain
Type the IP address of the PPTP server.
Connection ID/
Name
Type your identification name for the PPTP server.
Get automatically
from ISP
Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address.
This is the default selection.
Use Fixed IP
Address
Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address.
My WAN IP
Address
Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fixed IP
Address.
My IP Subnet
Mask
Your NBG4604 will automatically calculate the subnet mask based
on the IP address that you assign. Unless you are implementing
subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by the NBG4604.
WAN IP Address Assignment
Get automatically
from ISP
Select this to get your WAN IP address from your ISP.
DNS Servers
First DNS Server
Second DNS Server
Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server
information (and the NBG4604's WAN IP address). The field to the
right displays the (read-only) DNS server IP address that the ISP
assigns.
Select User-Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server.
Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. If you
chose User-Defined, but leave the IP address set to 0.0.0.0, UserDefined changes to None after you click Apply. If you set a second
choice to User-Defined, and enter the same IP address, the
second User-Defined changes to None after you click Apply.
Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do
not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a
computer in order to access it.
110
WAN MAC Address
The MAC address section allows users to configure the WAN port's
MAC address by either using the NBG4604’s MAC address, copying
the MAC address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering
a MAC address.
Factory default
Select Factory default to use the factory assigned default MAC
Address.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 8 WAN
Table 40 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPTP Encapsulation
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Clone the
computer’s MAC
address - IP
Address
Select Clone the computer's MAC address - IP Address and
enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you
are cloning. Once it is successfully configured, the address will be
copied to the rom file. It will not change unless you change the
setting or upload a different ROM file.
Set WAN MAC
Address
Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604.
Reset
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
8.5 Advanced WAN Screen
Use this screen to enable Multicast, allow Windows Networking and enable
Auto-bridge.
Note: The three categories shown in this screen are independent of each other.
To change your NBG4604’s advanced WAN settings, click Network > WAN >
Advanced. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 63 Network > WAN > Advanced
NBG4604 User’s Guide
111
Chapter 8 WAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 41 Network > WAN > Advanced
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Multicast Setup
Multicast
Check this to enable multicasting. This applies to traffic routed from
the WAN to the LAN.
Leaving this blank may cause incoming traffic to be dropped or sent
to all connected network devices.
Windows Networking (NetBIOS over TCP/IP)
Allow between LAN
and WAN
Select this check box to forward NetBIOS packets from the LAN to
the WAN and from the WAN to the LAN. If your firewall is enabled
with the default policy set to block WAN to LAN traffic, you also
need to enable the default WAN to LAN firewall rule that forwards
NetBIOS traffic.
Clear this check box to block all NetBIOS packets going from the
LAN to the WAN and from the WAN to the LAN.
Allow Trigger Dial
Select this option to allow NetBIOS packets to initiate calls.
Auto-bridge
112
Enable Auto-bridge
mode
Select this option to have the NBG4604 switch to bridge mode
automatically when the NBG4604 gets a WAN IP address in the
range of 192.168.x.y (where x and y are from zero to nine) no
matter what the LAN IP address is.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604.
Reset
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
CHAPTER
9
LAN
9.1 Overview
This chapter describes how to configure LAN settings.
A Local Area Network (LAN) is a shared communication system to which many
computers are attached. A LAN is a computer network limited to the immediate
area, usually the same building or floor of a building. The LAN screens can help
you configure a LAN DHCP server, manage IP addresses, and partition your
physical network into logical networks.
Figure 64 LAN Setup
The LAN screens can help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP
addresses.
9.2 What You Can Do
Use the IP screen (Section 9.4 on page 115) to change your basic LAN settings.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
113
Chapter 9 LAN
9.3 What You Need To Know
The actual physical connection determines whether the NBG4604 ports are LAN or
WAN ports. There are two separate IP networks, one inside the LAN network and
the other outside the WAN network as shown next.
Figure 65 LAN and WAN IP Addresses
The LAN parameters of the NBG4604 are preset in the factory with the following
values:
• IP address of 192.168.1.1 with subnet mask of 255.255.255.0 (24 bits)
• DHCP server enabled with 32 client IP addresses starting from 192.168.1.33.
These parameters should work for the majority of installations. If your ISP gives
you explicit DNS server address(es), read the embedded Web Configurator help
regarding what fields need to be configured.
9.3.1 IP Pool Setup
The NBG4604 is pre-configured with a pool of 32 IP addresses starting from
192.168.1.33 to 192.168.1.64. This configuration leaves 31 IP addresses
(excluding the NBG4604 itself) in the lower range (192.168.1.2 to 192.168.1.32)
for other server computers, for instance, servers for mail, FTP, TFTP, web, etc.,
that you may have.
Refer to Section 4.4.6 on page 49 for information on IP Address and Subnet Mask.
9.3.2 LAN TCP/IP
The NBG4604 has built-in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and
DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability.
Refer to the Section 4.4.7 on page 50 section for information on System DNS
Servers.
114
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 9 LAN
9.4 LAN IP Screen
Use this screen to change your basic LAN settings. Click Network > LAN.
Figure 66 Network > LAN > IP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 42 Network > LAN > IP
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Get from DHCP
Server
Select this to have your NBG4604 receive its IP address automatically
from a DHCP server.
User Defined LAN
IP
Select this to manually enter the IP address and Subnet Mask as they
were provided to you by your network administrator.
IP Address
Type the IP address of your NBG4604 in dotted decimal notation
192.168.1.1 (factory default).
IP Subnet
Mask
The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP
address. Your NBG4604 will automatically calculate the subnet mask
based on the IP address that you assign. Unless you are implementing
subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by the NBG4604.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604.
Reset
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
115
Chapter 9 LAN
116
NBG4604 User’s Guide
CHAPTER
10
DHCP Server
10.1 Overview
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows
individual clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can
configure the NBG4604’s LAN as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a
server, the NBG4604 provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If DHCP
service is disabled, you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the
computer must be manually configured.
10.2 What You Can Do
• Use the General screen (Section 10.4 on page 118) to enable the DHCP server.
• Use the Advanced screen (Section 10.5 on page 118) to assign IP addresses on
the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses.
• Use the Client List screen (Section 10.6 on page 120) to view the current DHCP
client information.
10.3 What You Need To Know
Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC
address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal
characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. Find out the MAC addresses of your
network devices if you intend to add them to the DHCP Client List screen.
Refer to Section 4.4.6 on page 49 for information on IP Address and Subnet Mask.
Refer to the Section 4.4.7 on page 50 section for information on System DNS
Servers.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
117
Chapter 10 DHCP Server
10.4 General Screen
Use this screen to enable the DHCP server. Click Network > DHCP Server. The
following screen displays.
Figure 67 Network > DHCP Server > General
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 43 Network > DHCP Server > General
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Enable DHCP
Server
Enable or Disable DHCP for LAN.
IP Pool Starting
Address
This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP
address pool for LAN.
Pool Size
This field specifies the size, or count of the IP address pool for LAN.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604.
Reset
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC
2132) allows individual clients (computers) to obtain TCP/IP
configuration at startup from a server. Leave the Enable DHCP
Server check box selected unless your ISP instructs you to do
otherwise. Clear it to disable the NBG4604 acting as a DHCP server.
When configured as a server, the NBG4604 provides TCP/IP
configuration for the clients. If not, DHCP service is disabled and
you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the
computers must be manually configured. When set as a server, fill in
the following four fields.
10.5 Advanced Screen
This screen allows you to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual
computers based on their MAC addresses. You can also use this screen to
configure the DNS server information that the NBG4604 sends to the DHCP
clients.
118
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 10 DHCP Server
To change your NBG4604’s static DHCP settings, click Network > DHCP Server
> Advanced. The following screen displays.
Figure 68 Network > DHCP Server > Advanced
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 44 Network > DHCP Server > Advanced
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Static DHCP Table
#
This is the index number of the static IP table entry (row).
MAC Address
Type the MAC address (with colons) of a computer on your LAN.
IP Address
Type the LAN IP address of a computer on your LAN.
DNS Server
DNS Servers
Assigned by
DHCP Server
NBG4604 User’s Guide
The NBG4604 passes a DNS (Domain Name System) server IP
address (in the order you specify here) to the DHCP clients. The
NBG4604 only passes this information to the LAN DHCP clients when
you select the Enable DHCP Server check box. When you clear the
Enable DHCP Server check box, DHCP service is disabled and you
must have another DHCP sever on your LAN, or else the computers
must have their DNS server addresses manually configured.
119
Chapter 10 DHCP Server
Table 44 Network > DHCP Server > Advanced
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
First DNS Server
Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server
information (and the NBG4604's WAN IP address). The field to the
right displays the (read-only) DNS server IP address that the ISP
assigns.
Second DNS
Server
Select User-Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server.
Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. If you chose
User-Defined, but leave the IP address set to 0.0.0.0, User-Defined
changes to None after you click Apply. If you set a second choice to
User-Defined, and enter the same IP address, the second UserDefined changes to None after you click Apply.
Select DNS Relay to have the NBG4604 act as a DNS proxy. The
NBG4604's LAN IP address displays in the field to the right (readonly). The NBG4604 tells the DHCP clients on the LAN that the
NBG4604 itself is the DNS server. When a computer on the LAN sends
a DNS query to the NBG4604, the NBG4604 forwards the query to the
NBG4604's system DNS server (configured in the WAN > Internet
Connection screen) and relays the response back to the computer.
You can only select DNS Relay for one of the three servers; if you
select DNS Relay for a second or third DNS server, that choice
changes to None after you click Apply.
Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do
not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a
computer in order to access it.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604.
Reset
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
10.6 Client List Screen
The DHCP table shows current DHCP client information (including IP Address,
Host Name and MAC Address) of network clients using the NBG4604’s DHCP
servers.
Configure this screen to always assign an IP address to a MAC address (and host
name). Click Network > DHCP Server > Client List.
Note: You can also view a read-only client list by clicking the DHCP Table (Details...)
hyperlink in the Status screen.
120
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 10 DHCP Server
The following screen displays.
Figure 69 Network > DHCP Server > Client List
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 45 Network > DHCP Server > Client List
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
#
This is the index number of the host computer.
IP Address
This field displays the IP address relative to the # field listed above.
Host Name
This field displays the computer host name.
MAC Address
The MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address on a LAN
(Local Area Network) is unique to your computer (six pairs of
hexadecimal notation).
A network interface card such as an Ethernet adapter has a
hardwired address that is assigned at the factory. This address
follows an industry standard that ensures no other adapter has a
similar address.
Reserve
Select this check box in the DHCP Setup section to have the
NBG4604 always assign the IP address(es) to the MAC address(es)
(and host name(s)). After you click Apply, the MAC address and IP
address also display in the Advanced screen (where you can edit
them).
Apply
Click Apply to save your settings.
Refresh
Click Refresh to reload the DHCP table.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
121
Chapter 10 DHCP Server
122
NBG4604 User’s Guide
CHAPTER
11
Network Address Translation
(NAT)
11.1 Overview
This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the NBG4604.
NAT (Network Address Translation - NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP
address of a host in a packet. For example, the source address of an outgoing
packet, used within one network is changed to a different IP address known within
another network.
Each packet has two addresses – a source address and a destination address. For
outgoing packets, NAT maps private (local) IP addresses to globally unique ones
required for communication with hosts on other networks. It replaces the original
IP source address in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet. The
NBG4604 keeps track of the original addresses and port numbers so incoming
reply packets can have their original values restored. The following figure
illustrates this.
Figure 70 NAT Example
For more information on IP address translation, refer to RFC 1631, The IP Network
Address Translator (NAT).
NBG4604 User’s Guide
123
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
Note: You must create a firewall rule in addition to setting up NAT, to allow traffic from
the WAN to be forwarded through the NBG4604.
11.2 What You Can Do
• Use the General screen (Section 11.3 on page 124) to enable NAT and set a
default server.
• Use the Application screen (Section 11.4 on page 125) to change your
NBG4604’s port forwarding settings.
• Use the Advanced screen (Section 11.5 on page 128) to change your
NBG4604’s trigger port settings.
11.3 General NAT Screen
Use this screen to enable NAT and set a default server. Click Network > NAT to
open the General screen.
Figure 71 Network > NAT > General
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 46 Network > NAT > General
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
NAT Setup
Enable Network
Address
Translation
Network Address Translation (NAT) allows the translation of an Internet
protocol address used within one network (for example a private IP
address used in a local network) to a different IP address known within
another network (for example a public IP address used on the Internet).
Select the check box to enable NAT.
Default Server Setup
124
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
Table 46 Network > NAT > General
LABEL
Server IP
Address
DESCRIPTION
In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default
server. A default server receives packets from ports that are not
specified in the Application screen.
If you do not assign a Default Server IP address, the NBG4604
discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in the
Application screen or remote management.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604.
Reset
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
11.4 NAT Application Screen
Use the Application screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s)
on your local network. You may enter a single port number or a range of port
numbers to be forwarded, and the local IP address of the desired server. The port
number identifies a service; for example, web service is on port 80 and FTP on
port 21. In some cases, such as for unknown services or where one server can
support more than one service (for example both FTP and web service), it might
be better to specify a range of port numbers.
In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server. A
service request that does not have a server explicitly designated for it is forwarded
to the default server. If the default is not defined, the service request is simply
discarded.
Note: Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server
processes (such as a Web or FTP server) from your location. Your ISP may
periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any
active services at your location. If you are unsure, refer to your ISP.
Port forwarding allows you to define the local servers to which the incoming
services will be forwarded. To change your NBG4604’s port forwarding settings,
click Network > NAT > Application. The screen appears as shown.
Note: If you do not assign a Default Server IP address in the NAT > General screen,
the NBG4604 discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in
this screen or remote management.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
125
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
Refer to Appendix E on page 261 for port numbers commonly used for particular
services.
Figure 72 Network > NAT > Application
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 47 Network > NAT > Application
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add Application Rule
Active
Select the check box to enable this rule and the requested service can
be forwarded to the host with a specified internal IP address.
Clear the checkbox to disallow forwarding of these ports to an inside
server without having to delete the entry.
Service Name
Type a name (of up to 31 printable characters) to identify this rule in
the first field next to Service Name. Otherwise, select a predefined
service in the second field next to Service Name. The predefined
service name and port number(s) will display in the Service Name and
Port fields.
Local Port
Range
Enter the port number ranges to be forwarded.
Public Port
Range
126
Server IP
Address
Type the inside IP address of the server that receives packets from the
port(s) specified in the Port field.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes to the Application Rules Summary
table.
Reset
Click Reset to not save and return your new changes in the Service
Name and Port fields to the previous one.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
Table 47 Network > NAT > Application (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Application Rules Summary
#
This is the number of an individual port forwarding server entry.
Active
This icon is turned on when the rule is enabled.
Name
This field displays a name to identify this rule.
Local Start/End
Port
This field displays the port number(s).
Public Start/End
Port
Server IP
Address
This field displays the inside IP address of the server.
Modify
Click the Edit icon to display and modify an existing rule setting in the
fields under Add Application Rule.
Click the Remove icon to delete a rule.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
127
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
11.5 NAT Advanced Screen
Some services use a dedicated range of ports on the client side and a dedicated
range of ports on the server side. With regular port forwarding you set a
forwarding port in NAT to forward a service (coming in from the server on the
WAN) to the IP address of a computer on the client side (LAN). The problem is
that port forwarding only forwards a service to a single LAN IP address. In order to
use the same service on a different LAN computer, you have to manually replace
the LAN computer's IP address in the forwarding port with another LAN
computer's IP address.
Trigger port forwarding solves this problem by allowing computers on the LAN to
dynamically take turns using the service. The NBG4604 records the IP address of
a LAN computer that sends traffic to the WAN to request a service with a specific
port number and protocol (a "trigger" port). When the NBG4604's WAN port
receives a response with a specific port number and protocol ("incoming" port),
the NBG4604 forwards the traffic to the LAN IP address of the computer that sent
the request. After that computer’s connection for that service closes, another
computer on the LAN can use the service in the same manner. This way you do not
need to configure a new IP address each time you want a different LAN computer
to use the application.
To change your NBG4604’s trigger port settings, click Network > NAT >
Advanced. The screen appears as shown.
Note: Only one LAN computer can use a trigger port (range) at a time.
Figure 73 Network > NAT > Advanced
128
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 48 Network > NAT > Advanced
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
#
This is the rule index number (read-only).
Name
Type a unique name (up to 15 characters) for identification purposes. All
characters are permitted - including spaces.
Incoming
Incoming is a port (or a range of ports) that a server on the WAN uses
when it sends out a particular service. The NBG4604 forwards the traffic
with this port (or range of ports) to the client computer on the LAN that
requested the service.
Start Port
Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port
numbers.
End Port
Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port
numbers.
Trigger
The trigger port is a port (or a range of ports) that causes (or triggers)
the NBG4604 to record the IP address of the LAN computer that sent
the traffic to a server on the WAN.
Start Port
Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port
numbers.
End Port
Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port
numbers.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604.
Reset
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
11.5.1 Trigger Port Forwarding Example
The following is an example of trigger port forwarding.
Figure 74 Trigger Port Forwarding Process: Example
1
Jane requests a file from the Real Audio server (port 7070).
NBG4604 User’s Guide
129
Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)
2
Port 7070 is a “trigger” port and causes the NBG4604 to record Jane’s computer IP
address. The NBG4604 associates Jane's computer IP address with the "incoming"
port range of 6970-7170.
3
The Real Audio server responds using a port number ranging between 6970-7170.
4
The NBG4604 forwards the traffic to Jane’s computer IP address.
5
Only Jane can connect to the Real Audio server until the connection is closed or
times out. The NBG4604 times out in three minutes with UDP (User Datagram
Protocol), or two hours with TCP/IP (Transfer Control Protocol/Internet Protocol).
11.5.2 Two Points To Remember About Trigger Ports
130
1
Trigger events only happen on data that is going coming from inside the NBG4604
and going to the outside.
2
If an application needs a continuous data stream, that port (range) will be tied up
so that another computer on the LAN can’t trigger it.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
CHAPTER
12
Dynamic DNS
12.1 Overview
Dynamic DNS (DDNS) services let you use a domain name with a dynamic IP
address.
12.2 What You Can Do
Use the Dynamic DNS screen (Section 12.4 on page 132) to enable DDNS and
configure the DDNS settings on the NBG4604.
12.3 What You Need To Know
Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or
many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you (in NetMeeting, CUSeeMe, etc.). You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own
computer using a domain name (for instance myhost.dhs.org, where myhost is a
name of your choice) that will never change instead of using an IP address that
changes each time you reconnect. Your friends or relatives will always be able to
call you even if they don't know your IP address.
12.3.1 DynDNS Wildcard
Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes *.yourhost.dyndns.org to be
aliased to the same IP address as yourhost.dyndns.org. This feature is useful if
you want to be able to use, for example, www.yourhost.dyndns.org and still reach
your hostname.
Note: If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use Dynamic DNS. You
must have a public WAN IP address.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
131
Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS
12.4 Dynamic DNS Screen
To change your NBG4604’s DDNS, click Network > DDNS. The screen appears as
shown.
Figure 75 Network > Dynamic DNS
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 49 Network > Dynamic DNS
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Dynamic DNS Setup
132
Enable Dynamic
DNS
Select this check box to use dynamic DNS.
Service Provider
Select the name of your Dynamic DNS service provider.
Dynamic DNS Type
Select the type of service that you are registered for from your
Dynamic DNS service provider.
Host Name
Enter a host names in the field provided. You can specify up to two
host names in the field separated by a comma (",").
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS
Table 49 Network > Dynamic DNS
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
User Name
Enter your user name.
Password
Enter the password assigned to you.
Token
Enter your client authorization key provided by the server to
update DynDNS records.
This field is configurable only when you select
WWW.REGFISH.COM in the Service Provider field.
Enable Wildcard
Option
Select the check box to enable DynDNS Wildcard.
Enable off line
option
This option is available when CustomDNS is selected in the DDNS
Type field. Check with your Dynamic DNS service provider to have
traffic redirected to a URL (that you can specify) while you are off
line.
IP Address Update Policy:
Use WAN IP Address Select this option to update the IP address of the host name(s) to
the WAN IP address.
Dynamic DNS
server auto detect
IP Address
Select this option to update the IP address of the host name(s)
automatically by the DDNS server. It is recommended that you
select this option.
Use specified IP
Address
Type the IP address of the host name(s). Use this if you have a
static IP address.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604.
Reset
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
133
Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS
134
NBG4604 User’s Guide
CHAPTER
13
Firewall
13.1 Overview
Use these screens to enable and configure the firewall that protects your NBG4604
and your LAN from unwanted or malicious traffic.
Enable the firewall to protect your LAN computers from attacks by hackers on the
Internet and control access between the LAN and WAN. By default the firewall:
• allows traffic that originates from your LAN computers to go to all of the
networks.
• blocks traffic that originates on the other networks from going to the LAN.
The following figure illustrates the default firewall action. User A can initiate an IM
(Instant Messaging) session from the LAN to the WAN (1). Return traffic for this
session is also allowed (2). However other traffic initiated from the WAN is blocked
(3 and 4).
Figure 76 Default Firewall Action
NBG4604 User’s Guide
135
Chapter 13 Firewall
13.2 What You Can Do
• Use the General screen (Section 13.4 on page 137) to enable or disable the
NBG4604’s firewall.
• Use the Access Control Rule (Section 13.5 on page 137) screen to view the
configured access control rules and add, edit or remove a rule.
• Use the Services screen (Section 13.6 on page 140) screen enable service
blocking, enter/delete/modify the services you want to block and the date/time
you want to block them.
13.3 What You Need To Know
The NBG4604’s firewall feature physically separates the LAN and the WAN and
acts as a secure gateway for all data passing between the networks.
13.3.1 About the NBG4604 Firewall
The NBG4604 firewall is a stateful inspection firewall and is designed to protect
against Denial of Service attacks when activated (click the General tab under
Firewall and then click the Enable Firewall check box). The NBG4604's purpose
is to allow a private Local Area Network (LAN) to be securely connected to the
Internet. The NBG4604 can be used to prevent theft, destruction and modification
of data, as well as log events, which may be important to the security of your
network.
The NBG4604 is installed between the LAN and a broadband modem connecting to
the Internet. This allows it to act as a secure gateway for all data passing between
the Internet and the LAN.
The NBG4604 has one Ethernet WAN port and four Ethernet LAN ports, which are
used to physically separate the network into two areas.The WAN (Wide Area
Network) port attaches to the broadband (cable or DSL) modem to the Internet.
The LAN (Local Area Network) port attaches to a network of computers, which
needs security from the outside world. These computers will have access to
Internet services such as e-mail, FTP and the World Wide Web. However, "inbound
access" is not allowed (by default) unless the remote host is authorized to use a
specific service.
136
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 13 Firewall
13.4 General Firewall Screen
Use this screen to enable or disable the NBG4604’s firewall, and set up firewall
logs. Click Security > Firewall to open the General screen.
Figure 77 Security > Firewall > General
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 50 Security > Firewall > General
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Enable Firewall
Select this check box to activate the firewall. The NBG4604 performs
access control and protects against Denial of Service (DoS) attacks
when the firewall is activated.
Apply
Click Apply to save the settings.
Reset
Click Reset to start configuring this screen again.
13.5 The Access Control Rule Screen
Click Firewall > Access Control Rule to display the following screen. This
screen displays a list of the configured access control rules.
Figure 78 Firewall > Access Control Rule
NBG4604 User’s Guide
137
Chapter 13 Firewall
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 51 Firewall > Access Control Rule
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Application Rules Summary
Packet
Direction
This displays the direction of traffic (WAN to WAN) to which this rule
applies.
The NBG4604 stops computers on the WAN from managing the
NBG4604 or using the NBG4604 as a gateway to communicate with
other computers on the WAN.
#
This is your firewall rule number. The ordering of your rules is important
as rules are applied in turn.
Active
This field displays whether a rule is turned on or not. A green bulb
signifies that this rule is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not
active.
Name
This displays the name of the rule.
Source IP
Address
This displays the source addresses or ranges of addresses to which this
rule applies.
Service List
Select the service to which this rule applies from the drop-down list box.
Select Protocol
Select the transport layer protocol that defines your customized port
from the drop-down list box.
If you want to configure a customized protocol, select Specific
Protocol.
Protocol Type
This displays the IP port that defines your customized port.
Port Range
This displays the port number or the range of port numbers of the
destination.
Action
This field displays whether the rule silently discards packets (Drop),
discards packets and sends a TCP reset packet or an ICMP destinationunreachable message to the sender (Reject) or allows the passage of
packets (Permit).
Modify
Click the Edit icon to edit the rule.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. Note that subsequent
rules move up by one when you take this action.
138
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 13 Firewall
13.5.1 Add/Edit an ACL Rule
Click Add New ACL Rule or the Edit icon next to an existing ACL rule in the
Access Control screen. The following screen displays.
Figure 79 Access Control Rule: Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 52 Access Control Rule: Add/Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Access Control Rule setup
Active
Select the check box to enable the rule. Clear the check box to disable
the rule.
Rule Name
Enter a descriptive name for the rule.
Source IP
Address
Enter the source addresses or ranges of addresses to which this rule
applies. Please note that a blank source or destination address is
equivalent to Any.
Service List
Select the service to which this rule applies from the drop-down list
box.
Select Protocol
Select the transport layer protocol that defines your customized port
from the drop-down list box.
If you want to configure a customized protocol, select Specific
Protocol.
Protocol Type
Choose the IP port (Both, TCP, or UDP) that defines your customized
port from the drop-down list box.
Port Range
Enter a single port number or the range of port numbers of the
destination.
Apply
Click Apply to save the settings.
Reset
Click Reset to start configuring this screen again.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
139
Chapter 13 Firewall
13.6 Services Screen
If an outside user attempts to probe an unsupported port on your NBG4604, an
ICMP response packet is automatically returned. This allows the outside user to
know the NBG4604 exists. Use this screen to prevent the ICMP response packet
from being sent. This keeps outsiders from discovering your NBG4604 when
unsupported ports are probed.
You can also use this screen to enable service blocking, enter/delete/modify the
services you want to block and the date/time you want to block them.
Click Security > Firewall > Services. The screen appears as shown next.
Figure 80 Security > Firewall > Services
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 53 Security > Firewall > Services
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
ICMP
Internet Control Message Protocol is a message control and errorreporting protocol between a host server and a gateway to the Internet.
ICMP uses Internet Protocol (IP) datagrams, but the messages are
processed by the TCP/IP software and directly apparent to the
application user.
Respond to Ping
on
The NBG4604 will not respond to any incoming Ping requests when
Disable is selected. Select LAN to reply to incoming LAN Ping requests.
Select WAN to reply to incoming WAN Ping requests. Otherwise select
LAN & WAN to reply to all incoming LAN and WAN Ping requests.
Do not respond
to requests for
unauthorized
services
Select this option to prevent hackers from finding the NBG4604 by
probing for unused ports. If you select this option, the NBG4604 will not
respond to port request(s) for unused ports, thus leaving the unused
ports and the NBG4604 unseen. By default this option is not selected
and the NBG4604 will reply with an ICMP Port Unreachable packet for a
port probe on its unused UDP ports, and a TCP Reset packet for a port
probe on its unused TCP ports.
Note that the probing packets must first traverse the NBG4604's firewall
mechanism before reaching this anti-probing mechanism. Therefore if
the firewall mechanism blocks a probing packet, the NBG4604 reacts
based on the firewall policy, which by default, is to send a TCP reset
packet for a blocked TCP packet. You can use the command "sys firewall
tcprst rst [on|off]" to change this policy. When the firewall mechanism
blocks a UDP packet, it drops the packet without sending a response
packet.
140
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 13 Firewall
Table 53 Security > Firewall > Services
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Apply
Click Apply to save the settings.
Reset
Click Reset to start configuring this screen again.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
141
Chapter 13 Firewall
142
NBG4604 User’s Guide
CHAPTER
14
Content Filtering
14.1 Overview
This chapter provides a brief overview of content filtering using the embedded
web GUI.
Internet content filtering allows you to create and enforce Internet access policies
tailored to your needs. Content filtering is the ability to block certain web features
or specific URL keywords.
14.2 What You Can Do
Use the Filter (Section 14.4 on page 144) screen to restrict web features, add
keywords for blocking and designate a trusted computer.
14.3 What You Need To Know
Content filtering allows you to block certain web features, such as cookies, and/or
block access to specific web sites. For example, you can configure one policy that
blocks John Doe’s access to arts and entertainment web pages.
14.3.1 Content Filtering Profiles
A content filtering profile conveniently stores your custom settings for the
following features.
Restrict Web Features
The NBG4604 can disable web proxies and block web features such as ActiveX
controls, Java applets and cookies.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
143
Chapter 14 Content Filtering
Keyword Blocking URL Checking
The NBG4604 checks the URL’s domain name (or IP address) and file path
separately when performing keyword blocking.
The URL’s domain name or IP address is the characters that come before the first
slash in the URL. For example, with the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/
pressroom.php, the domain name is www.zyxel.com.tw.
The file path is the characters that come after the first slash in the URL. For
example, with the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/pressroom.php, the file path is
news/pressroom.php.
Since the NBG4604 checks the URL’s domain name (or IP address) and file path
separately, it will not find items that go across the two. For example, with the URL
www.zyxel.com.tw/news/pressroom.php, the NBG4604 would find “tw” in the
domain name (www.zyxel.com.tw). It would also find “news” in the file path
(news/pressroom.php) but it would not find “tw/news”.
14.4 Filter Screen
Use this screen to restrict web features, add keywords for blocking and designate
a trusted computer. Click Security > Content Filter to open the Filter screen.
Figure 81 Security > Content Filter > Filter
144
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 14 Content Filtering
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 54 Security > Content Filter > Filter
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Enable URL
Keyword
Blocking
The NBG4604 can block Web sites with URLs that contain certain
keywords in the domain name or IP address. For example, if the
keyword "bad" was enabled, all sites containing this keyword in the
domain name or IP address will be blocked, e.g., URL http://
www.website.com/bad.html would be blocked. Select this check box to
enable this feature.
Keyword
Type a keyword in this field. You may use any character (up to 64
characters). Wildcards are not allowed. You can also enter a numerical
IP address.
Keyword List
This list displays the keywords already added.
Add
Click Add after you have typed a keyword.
Repeat this procedure to add other keywords. Up to 64 keywords are
allowed.
When you try to access a web page containing a keyword, you will get
a message telling you that the content filter is blocking this request.
Delete
Highlight a keyword in the lower box and click Delete to remove it.
The keyword disappears from the text box after you click Apply.
Clear All
Click this button to remove all of the listed keywords.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Reset
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh
14.5 Technical Reference
The following section contains additional technical information about the NBG4604
features described in this chapter.
14.5.1 Customizing Keyword Blocking URL Checking
You can use commands to set how much of a website’s URL the content filter is to
check for keyword blocking. See the appendices for information on how to access
and use the command interpreter.
Domain Name or IP Address URL Checking
By default, the NBG4604 checks the URL’s domain name or IP address when
performing keyword blocking.
This means that the NBG4604 checks the characters that come before the first
slash in the URL.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
145
Chapter 14 Content Filtering
For example, with the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/pressroom.php, content
filtering only searches for keywords within www.zyxel.com.tw.
Full Path URL Checking
Full path URL checking has the NBG4604 check the characters that come before
the last slash in the URL.
For example, with the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/pressroom.php, full path URL
checking searches for keywords within www.zyxel.com.tw/news/.
Use the ip urlfilter customize actionFlags 6 [disable | enable]
command to extend (or not extend) the keyword blocking search to include the
URL's full path.
File Name URL Checking
Filename URL checking has the NBG4604 check all of the characters in the URL.
For example, filename URL checking searches for keywords within the URL
www.zyxel.com.tw/news/pressroom.php.
Use the ip urlfilter customize actionFlags 8 [disable | enable]
command to extend (or not extend) the keyword blocking search to include the
URL's complete filename.
146
NBG4604 User’s Guide
CHAPTER
15
Static Route
15.1 Overview
This chapter shows you how to configure static routes for your NBG4604.
Each remote node specifies only the network to which the gateway is directly
connected, and the NBG4604 has no knowledge of the networks beyond. For
instance, the NBG4604 knows about network N2 in the following figure through
remote node Router 1. However, the NBG4604 is unable to route a packet to
network N3 because it doesn't know that there is a route through the same
remote node Router 1 (via gateway Router 2). The static routes are for you to tell
the NBG4604 about the networks beyond the remote nodes.
Figure 82 Example of Static Routing Topology
15.2 What You Can Do
• Use the IP Static Route screen (Section 15.3 on page 148) to view existing
static route rules.
• Use the Static Route Setup screen (Section 15.3.1 on page 149) to add or edit
a static route rule.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
147
Chapter 15 Static Route
15.3 IP Static Route Screen
Use this screen to view existing static route rules. Click Management > Static
Route to open the IP Static Route screen. The following screen displays.
Figure 83 Management > Static Route > IP Static Route
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 55 Management > Static Route > IP Static Route
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
#
This is the index number of an individual static route. The first entry is
for the default route and not editable.
Name
This is the name that describes or identifies this route.
Active
This icon is turned on when this static route is active.
Click the Edit icon under Modify and select the Active checkbox in the
Static Route Setup screen to enable the static route. Clear the
checkbox to disable this static route without having to delete the entry.
Destination
This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination.
Routing is always based on network number.
Gateway
This is the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is an immediate
neighbor of your NBG4604 that will forward the packet to the
destination. On the LAN, the gateway must be a router on the same
segment as your NBG4604; over the WAN, the gateway must be the IP
address of one of the remote nodes.
Modify
Click the Edit icon to open the static route setup screen. Modify a static
route or create a new static route in the Static Route Setup screen.
Click the Remove icon to delete a static route.
148
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 15 Static Route
15.3.1 Static Route Setup Screen
To edit a static route, click the edit icon under Modify. The following screen
displays. Fill in the required information for each static route.
Figure 84 Management > Static Route > IP Static Route: Static Route Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 56 Management > Static Route > IP Static Route: Static Route Setup
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Route Name
Enter the name of the IP static route. Leave this field blank to delete
this static route.
Active
This field allows you to activate/deactivate this static route.
Destination IP
Address
This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination.
Routing is always based on network number. If you need to specify a
route to a single host, use a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 in the
subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the
host ID.
IP Subnet Mask
Enter the IP subnet mask here.
Gateway IP
Address
Enter the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is an immediate
neighbor of your NBG4604 that will forward the packet to the
destination. On the LAN, the gateway must be a router on the same
segment as your NBG4604; over the WAN, the gateway must be the IP
address of one of the Remote Nodes.
Metric
Metric represents the “cost” of transmission for routing purposes. IP
routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost, with a minimum of
1 for directly connected networks. Enter a number that approximates
the cost for this link. The number need not be precise, but it must be
between 1 and 15. In practice, 2 or 3 is usually a good number.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604.
Cancel
Click Cancel to return to the previous screen and not save your
changes.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
149
Chapter 15 Static Route
150
NBG4604 User’s Guide
CHAPTER
16
Bandwidth Management
16.1 Overview
This chapter contains information about configuring bandwidth management and
editing rules.
ZyXEL’s Bandwidth Management allows you to specify bandwidth management
rules based on an application.
In the figure below, uplink traffic goes from the LAN device (A) to the WAN device
(B). Bandwidth management is applied before sending the packets out to the
WAN. Downlink traffic comes back from the WAN device (B) to the LAN device
(A). Bandwidth management is applied before sending the traffic out to LAN.
Figure 85 Bandwidth Management
-> FTP
-> HTTP
-> Chat, Email
A
B
You can allocate specific amounts of bandwidth capacity (bandwidth budgets) to
individual applications (like Web, FTP, and E-mail for example).
16.2 What You Can Do
• Use the General screen (Section 16.4 on page 152) to enable bandwidth
management and assign uplink/downlink limits.
• Use the Advanced screen (Section 16.5 on page 153) to configure bandwidth
management rules for the pre-defined services and applications.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
151
Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management
16.3 What You Need To Know
You can limit an application’s uplink or downlink bandwidth. This limit keeps the
traffic from using up too much of the out-going interface’s bandwidth. This way
you can make sure there is bandwidth for other applications. Use the following
guidelines:
• The sum of the bandwidth allotments that apply to the WAN interface (LAN to
WAN, WLAN to WAN) must be less than or equal to the Uplink value that you
configure in the Bandwidth Management General screen.
• The sum of the bandwidth allotments that apply to the LAN port (WAN to LAN,
WAN to WLAN) must be less than or equal to the Downlink value that you
configure in the Bandwidth Management General screen.
16.4 General Configuration
Use this screen to enable bandwidth management and assign uplink/downlink
limits. You can use either one of the following types:
• Priority Queue. Enable bandwidth management to give uplink traffic that
matches a bandwidth rule priority over traffic that does not match a bandwidth
rule. (This type does not apply to downlink traffic.)
• Bandwidth Allocation. Enabling bandwidth management also allows you to
control the maximum or minimum amounts of bandwidth that can be used by
traffic that matches a bandwidth rule.
Note: You cannot apply both bandwidth management types at the same time.
Click Management > Bandwidth MGMT to open the bandwidth management
General screen.
Figure 86 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > General
152
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 57 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > General
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Service Management
Bandwidth
Management
Type
This field allows you to have NBG4604 apply bandwidth management.
Select Priority Queue or Bandwidth Allocation to enable
bandwidth management.
•
•
Select Priority Queue to allocate bandwidth based on the predefined priority assigned to an application. Refer to Section 16.5 on
page 153.
Select Bandwidth Allocation allocate specific amounts of
bandwidth to specific protocols on an IP or IP range. Refer to
Section 16.5 on page 153.
Select Disable if you do not want to use this feature.
Total Bandwidth Setting. The fields below appear when you enable Bandwidth
Management.
Uplink
Type or select the total amount of bandwidth (from 64 Kbps to 30
Mbps) that you want to dedicate to uplink traffic.
If you type the amount of bandwidth, the selection automatically
becomes User Defined. If you select the amount of bandwidth, the
field automatically displays the value in Kbps.
This is traffic from LAN/WLAN to WAN.
Downlink
Type or select the total amount of bandwidth (from 64 Kbps to 30
Mbps) that you want to dedicate to downlink traffic.
If you type the amount of bandwidth, the selection automatically
becomes User Defined. If you select the amount of bandwidth, the
field automatically displays the value in Kbps.
This is traffic from WAN to LAN/WLAN.
Apply
Click Apply to save your customized settings.
Reset
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
16.5 Advanced Configuration
Use this screen to configure bandwidth managements rule for the pre-defined
services or applications.
Use this screen to configure bandwidth managements rule for specific protocols on
an IP or IP range.
Note: This screen contains the Priority Queue and Bandwidth Allocation tables.
Though both tables are described in this section, you can only apply the rules in
one table. Fill out the table of the Bandwidth Management Type you selected
in Section 16.4 on page 152.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
153
Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management
Click Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced to open the bandwidth
management Advanced screen.
Figure 87 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 58 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Priority Queue
154
Local IP
Address
Enter the IP address of the computer to which bandwidth management
does not apply.
Priority Queue
Use this table to allocate specific amounts of bandwidth based on the
pre-defined service.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management
Table 58 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
#
This is the number of an individual bandwidth management rule.
Enable
Select this check box to have the NBG4604 apply this bandwidth
management rule.
Service
This is the name of the service.
You can also enter the name (up to 10 keyboard characters) of a service
you want to add in the priority queue (for example, Messenger).
Priority
Select a priority from the drop down list box. Choose High or Low.
Specific Port
This displays the port/s assigned to the service.
You can also specify the port/s to services to which you want to allocate
bandwidth. Choose either Both, TCP or UDP in the drop-down menu
and enter the port or range of ports in the provided boxes.
Note: If you are entering a specific port and not a range of ports,
you can either leave the second port field blank or enter the
same port number again.
Bandwidth
Allocation
Use this table to allocate specific amounts of bandwidth to specific
protocols on an IP or IP range.
#
This is the number of an individual bandwidth management rule.
Enable
Select this check box to have the NBG4604 apply this bandwidth
management rule.
LAN IP Range
This displays the range of IP addresses for which the bandwidth
management rule applies.
Direction
These read-only labels represent uplink or downlink traffic.
To LAN applies bandwidth management to traffic from WAN to LAN/
WLAN (i.e., downlink).
To WAN applies bandwidth management to traffic from LAN/WLAN to
WAN (i.e., uplink).
Both applies bandwidth management to traffic that the NBG4604
forwards to both the LAN and the WAN.
Port Range
This displays the range of ports for which the bandwidth management
rule applies.
Policy
This displays either Max (maximum) or Min (minimum) and refers to
the maximum or minimum bandwidth allowed for the rule in kilobits per
second in the field below.
Rate
This is the maximum or minimum bandwidth allowed (refer to the field
above) for the rule in bits per second.
Modify
Click the Edit icon to open the Rule Configuration screen. Modify an
existing rule or create a new rule in the Rule Configuration screen.
See Section 16.5.2 on page 156 for more information.
Click the Remove icon to delete a rule.
Apply
Click Apply to save your customized settings.
Reset
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
155
Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management
16.5.1 Priority Levels
Traffic with a higher priority gets through faster while traffic with a lower priority is
dropped if the network is congested.
The following describes the priorities that you can apply to traffic that the
NBG4604 forwards out through an interface.
• High - Typically used for voice traffic or video that is especially sensitive to jitter
(jitter is the variations in delay).
• Low - This is typically used for all other traffic that are not time-sensitive.
16.5.2 User Defined Service Rule Configuration
If you want to edit a bandwidth management rule for specific protocols on an IP or
IP range, click the Edit icon in the Bandwidth Allocation table of the Advanced
screen. The following screen displays.
Figure 88 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced: Allocation Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 59 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced: Allocation Setup
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Active
Select this check box to turn on this bandwidth management rule.
Direction
Enter whether you want to apply the rule to uplink or downlink traffic.
To LAN applies bandwidth management to traffic from WAN to LAN/
WLAN (i.e., downlink).
To WAN applies bandwidth management to traffic from LAN/WLAN to
WAN (i.e., uplink).
Select Both applies bandwidth management to traffic that the
NBG4604 forwards to both the LAN and the WAN.
156
LAN IP Range
Specify the range of IP addresses for which the bandwidth management
rule applies.
Protocol
Select the protocol (TCP, UDP, SMTP, HTTP, POP3, FTP or ALL) for
which the bandwidth management rule applies.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Port Range
Enter the range of ports for which the bandwidth management rule
applies.
Policy
Select Max or Min and specify the maximum or minimum bandwidth
allowed for the rule in bits per second in the field below.
Rate (bps)
Type or select the maximum or minimum bandwidth allowed (refer to
the field above) for the rule in bits per second.
If you type the amount of bandwidth, the selection automatically
becomes User Defined. If you select the amount of bandwidth, the
field automatically displays the value in Kbps.
Apply
Click Apply to save your customized settings.
Reset
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
16.5.3 Predefined Bandwidth Management Services
The following is a description of the services that you can select and to which you
can apply media bandwidth management in the Management > Bandwidth
MGMT > Advanced screen.
Table 60 Media Bandwidth Management Setup: Services
SERVICE
DESCRIPTION
FTP
File Transfer Program enables fast transfer of files, including large files
that may not be possible by e-mail. FTP uses port number 21.
WWW
The World Wide Web (WWW) is an Internet system to distribute
graphical, hyper-linked information, based on Hyper Text Transfer
Protocol (HTTP) - a client/server protocol for the World Wide Web. The
Web is not synonymous with the Internet; rather, it is just one service
on the Internet. Other services on the Internet include Internet Relay
Chat and Newsgroups. The Web is accessed through use of a browser.
WWW uses port 80.
Telnet
Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the
Internet and in UNIX environments. It operates over TCP/IP networks.
Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems.
Telnet uses port 23.
E-Mail
Electronic mail consists of messages sent through a computer network
to specific groups or individuals. Here are some default ports for e-mail:
POP3 - port 110
SMTP - port 25
NBG4604 User’s Guide
157
Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management
Table 60 Media Bandwidth Management Setup: Services (continued)
SERVICE
DESCRIPTION
BitTorrent
BitTorrent is a free P2P (peer-to-peer) sharing tool allowing you to
distribute large software and media files using ports 6881 to 6889.
BitTorrent requires you to search for a file with a searching engine
yourself. It distributes files by corporation and trading, that is, the client
downloads the file in small pieces and share the pieces with other peers
to get other half of the file.
Gaming
Online gaming services lets you play multiplayer games on the Internet
via broadband technology. One example is Microsoft’s Xbox Live, which
uses port 3074. As of this writing, your NBG4604 supports Xbox,
Playstation, Battlenet and MSN Game Zone.
16.5.4 Services and Port Numbers
See Appendix E on page 261 for commonly used services and port numbers.
158
NBG4604 User’s Guide
CHAPTER
17
Remote Management
17.1 Overview
This chapter provides information on the Remote Management screens.
Remote management allows you to determine which services/protocols can access
which NBG4604 interface (if any) from which computers.
You may manage your NBG4604 from a remote location via:
•
LAN only
•
LAN and WAN
Note: When you configure remote management to allow management from the LAN
and WAN in the options above, you still need to configure a firewall rule to allow
access. See the firewall chapters for details on configuring firewall rules.
Note: The Remote MGMT screens are accessible to the supervisor level account
only.
Note: The Remote MGMT screens should be configured with Access Control Rule
(Section 13.5 on page 137) for applying remote management from WAN/
Internet.
17.2 What You Can Do
Use the WWW screen (Section 17.4 on page 161) to change your NBG4604’s
World Wide Web settings.
• Use the Telnet screen (Section 17.5 on page 162) to configure through which
interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use Telnet to manage the
NBG4604.
• Use the FTP screen (Section 17.6 on page 162) to configure through which
interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use FTP to access the
NBG4604.
• Your NBG4604 can act as an SNMP agent, which allows a manager station to
manage and monitor the NBG4604 through the network. Use the SNMP screen
(see Section 17.7 on page 163) to configure SNMP settings. You can also specify
from which IP addresses the access can come.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
159
Chapter 17 Remote Management
• Use the ACS screen (Section 17.8 on page 166) to configure set up the ACS
server information on your NBG4604.
17.3 What You Need To Know
To disable remote management of a service, select Disable in the corresponding
Server Access field. You may only have one remote management session
running at a time.
17.3.1 Remote Management Limitations
Remote management over LAN or WAN will not work when:
1
You have disabled that service in one of the remote management screens.
2
The IP address in the Secured Client IP Address field does not match the client
IP address. If it does not match, the NBG4604 will disconnect the session
immediately.
3
There is already another remote management session with an equal or higher
priority running. You may only have one remote management session running at
one time.
4
There is a firewall rule that blocks it.
17.3.2 Remote Management and NAT
When NAT is enabled:
• Use the NBG4604’s WAN IP address when configuring from the WAN.
• Use the NBG4604’s LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN.
17.3.3 System Timeout
There is a default system management idle timeout of five minutes (three
hundred seconds). The NBG4604 automatically logs you out if the management
session remains idle for longer than this timeout period. The management session
does not time out when a statistics screen is polling. You can change the timeout
period in the System screen
160
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 17 Remote Management
17.4 WWW Screen
To change your NBG4604’s World Wide Web settings, click Management >
Remote MGMT to display the WWW screen.
Figure 89 Management > Remote MGMT > WWW
The following table describes the labels in this screen
Table 61 Management > Remote MGMT > WWW
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Server Port
You may change the server port number for a service if needed,
however you must use the same port number in order to use that
service for remote management.
Server Access
Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the
NBG4604 using this service.
Secured Client
IP Address
A secured client is a “trusted” computer that is allowed to communicate
with the NBG4604 using this service.
Select All to allow any computer to access the NBG4604 using this
service.
Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that
you specify to access the NBG4604 using this service.
Note: This only applies on WAN IP.
Apply
Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen.
Reset
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
161
Chapter 17 Remote Management
17.5 The Telnet Screen
You can use Telnet to access the NBG4604’s command line interface. Specify
which interfaces allow Telnet access and from which IP address the access can
come.
Click Management > Remote MGMT > Telnet tab to display the screen as
shown.
Figure 90 Management > Remote Management > Telnet
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 62 Management > Remote Management > Telnet
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Server Port
You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however
you must use the same port number in order to use that service for
remote management.
Server Access
Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the
NBG4604 using this service.
Secured Client
IP Addess
A secured client is a “trusted” computer that is allowed to communicate
with the NBG4604 using this service.
Select All to allow any computer to access the NBG4604 using this
service.
Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you
specify to access the NBG4604 using this service.
Apply
Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen.
Reset
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
17.6 The FTP Screen
You can use FTP (File Transfer Protocol) to upload and download the NBG4604’s
firmware and configuration files. Please see the User’s Guide chapter on firmware
162
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 17 Remote Management
and configuration file maintenance for details. To use this feature, your computer
must have an FTP client.
Use this screen to specify which interfaces allow FTP access and from which IP
address the access can come. To change your NBG4604’s FTP settings, click
Management > Remote MGMT > FTP. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 91 Management > Remote Management > FTP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 63 Management > Remote Management > FTP
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Server Port
You may change the server port number for a service, if needed.
However, you must use the same port number in order to use that
service for remote management.
Server Access
Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the
NBG4604 using this service.
Secured Client
IP Address
A secured client is a “trusted” computer that is allowed to communicate
with the NBG4604 using this service.
Select All to allow any computer to access the NBG4604 using this
service.
Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that
you specify to access the NBG4604 using this service.
Apply
Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen.
Reset
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
17.7 The SNMP Screen
Simple Network Management Protocol is a protocol used for exchanging
management information between network devices. Your NBG4604 supports
SNMP agent functionality, which allows a manager station to manage and monitor
the NBG4604 through the network. The NBG4604 supports SNMP version one
NBG4604 User’s Guide
163
Chapter 17 Remote Management
(SNMPv1) and version two (SNMPv2c). The next figure illustrates an SNMP
management operation.
Figure 92 SNMP Management Model
An SNMP managed network consists of two main types of component: agents and
a manager.
An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed device (the
NBG4604). An agent translates the local management information from the
managed device into a form compatible with SNMP. The manager is the console
through which network administrators perform network management functions. It
executes applications that control and monitor managed devices.
The managed devices contain object variables/managed objects that define each
piece of information to be collected about a device. Examples of variables include
such as number of packets received, node port status etc. A Management
Information Base (MIB) is a collection of managed objects. SNMP allows a
manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects.
SNMP itself is a simple request/response protocol based on the manager/agent
model. The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the
following protocol operations:
• Get - Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent.
• GetNext - Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table
or list within an agent. In SNMPv1, when a manager wants to retrieve all
elements of a table from an agent, it initiates a Get operation, followed by a
series of GetNext operations.
164
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 17 Remote Management
• Set - Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent.
• Trap - Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events.
17.7.1 Configuring SNMP
To change your NBG4604’s SNMP settings, click Management > Remote MGMT
> SNMP tab. The screen appears as shown. Use this screen to configure your
SNMP settings.
Figure 93 Management > Remote MGMT > SNMP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 64 Management > Remote MGMT > SNMP
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
SNMP Settings
Server Port
The SNMP agent listens on port 161 by default. If you change the SNMP
server port to a different number on the NBG4604, for example 8161,
then you must notify people who need to access the NBG4604 SNMP
agent to use the same port.
Server Access
Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the
NBG4604 using this service.
Secured Client
IP Address
A secured client is a “trusted” computer that is allowed to access the
SNMP agent on the NBG4604.
Select All to allow any computer to access the SNMP agent.
Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you
specify to access the SNMP agent.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
165
Chapter 17 Remote Management
Table 64 Management > Remote MGMT > SNMP (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
SNMP Settings
Enable SNMP
Select this to enable SNMP on this device.
SNMP version
Select the SNMP version that corresponds the SNMP used by the server.
Read
Community
Enter the SNMP read community information here.
Set
Community
Enter the SNMP get community information here.
System
Location
Enter the SNMP system location.
System
Contact
Enter the SNMP system contact.
Trap Settings
Trap Settings
Select this to enable trap settings on this device.
Trap Manager
IP
Type the IP address of the station to send your SNMP traps to.
Trap
Community
Type the trap community, which is the password sent with each trap to
the SNMP manager. The default is public and allows all requests.
Apply
Click Apply to save the setting to the NBG4604.
Cancel
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
17.8 The ACS Screen
An administrator can use an ACS to remotely set up the NBG4604, modify its
settings, perform firmware upgrades, and monitor and diagnose it. In order to do
so, you must enable the TR-069 feature on your NBG4604 and then configure it
appropriately. (The ACS server which it will use must also be configured by its
administrator.)
The following terms and concepts may help as you read this part.
ACS
An Auto-Configuration Server (ACS) centralizes the management and
configuration of a variety of networking devices such as routers, set-top boxes,
Voice over IP (VoIP) gateways, and other Customer Premises Equipment (CPE). It
is based on the TR-069 standard.
OUI Filter
An Organizationally Unique Identifier (OUI) filter blocks or forwards packets from
devices with the specified OUI in the MAC address. The OUI field is the first three
166
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 17 Remote Management
octets in a MAC address and uniquely identifies the manufacturer of a network
device.
STUN
STUN allows a device to find the public IP address assigned by a NAT router and/
or a firewall between it and the public Internet.
17.9 ACS Screen
The ACS screen allows you to set up the ACS server information on your NBG4604
so it can be remotely updated. Only use information provided by your network
administrator. You can also upload encrypted security certificates to your
NBG4604.
17.9.1 STUN
STUN (Simple Traversal of User Datagram Protocol (UDP) through Network
Address Translators) allows the NBG4604 to find the presence and types of NAT
routers and/or firewalls between it and the public Internet. STUN also allows the
NBG4604 to find the public IP address that NAT assigned. STUN does not work
with symmetric NAT routers or firewalls. See RFC 3489 for details on STUN.
The following figure shows how STUN works.
1
The NBG4604 (A) sends packets to the STUN server (B).
2
The STUN server (B) finds the public IP address and port number that the NAT
router used on the NBG4604’s packets and sends them to the NBG4604.
3
The NBG4604 uses the public IP address and port number in the packets that it
sends to the server (C).
Figure 94 STUN
NBG4604 User’s Guide
167
Chapter 17 Remote Management
Click Management > Remote MGMT > ACS to open this screen.
Figure 95 Management > Remote MGMT > ACS
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 65 Management > Remote MGMT > ACS
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
ACS Server Setup
URL
Enter the URL of the ACS server.
Account Name
Enter the login name used by the NBG4604 to log into the ACS
server.
Password
Enter the password for the account used to log into the ACS
server.
Period
Enter the duration in seconds over which the NBG4604
attempts to log into the ACS server.
Device Configuration
Manufacturer
168
This displays the manufacturer name of the NBG4604, ‘ZyXEL’,
and cannot be edited.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 17 Remote Management
Table 65 Management > Remote MGMT > ACS (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Manufacturer Oui
Enter the manufacturer organizational unit identifier. This
number must consist of a 3-octet MAC address.
Product Class
Enter the product class if this was provided by the network
adminstrator. Otherwise, leave it at its default setting.
Model Name
This displays the model name. In this case, it is ‘NBG4604’ and
cannot be edited.
Device Connection Request
Username
Enter the username required for the ACS server to connect
directly to the NBG4604.
Password
Enter the password required for the ACS server to connect
directly to the NBG4604.
Device Connection Request
STUN Server
Enter the URL of the STUN server.
STUN Username
Enter the username required to log into the STUN server.
STUN Password
Enter the password of the username used to log into the STUN
server.
Logs
Backup
Click Backup to save a copy of the NBG4604’s ACS activity.
Clear Logs
Click Clear Logs to delete the files containing a record of the
NBG4604’s ACS activity.
Upload Certificate
File Path
Enter the path of the certificate file’s location on your local
computer, or click the Browse button to open a browse dialog
box to search for it.
CA Certificate
Click Upload to copy the certicate listed in File Path to the
NBG4604. Click Clear to remove the current CA Certificate
from the device.
Client Certificate
Click Upload to copy the certicate listed in File Path to the
NBG4604. Click Clear to remove the current Client Certificate
from the device.
Client Key
Click Upload to copy the certicate listed in File Path to the
NBG4604. Click Clear Key to remove the current CA
Certificate from the device.
Apply
Click Apply to save the setting to the NBG4604.
Reset
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
169
Chapter 17 Remote Management
17.10 Technical Reference
TR-069 is an abbreviation of “Technical Reference 069”, a protocol designed to
facilitate the remote management of Customer Premise Equipement (CPE), such
as the NBG4604. It can be managed over a WAN by means of an Auto
Configuration Server (ACS). TR-069 is based on sending Remote Procedure Calls
(RPCs) between the ACS and the client device. RPCs are sent in Extensible Markup
Language (XML) format over HTTP or HTTPS.
Figure 96 TR-069 Example
ACS
HTTP
In this example, the NBG4604 receives data from at least 2 sources: an HTTP
server for handling web services and an ACS, for configuring the NBG4604
remotely. All three servers are owned and operated by the client’s Internet Service
Provider. However, without the configuration settings from the ACS, the NBG4604
cannot access the other server. Once the NBG4604 receives its configuration
settings and implements them, it can connect to the other server. If the settings
change, it will once again be unable to connect until it receives its updates from
the ACS.
The NBG4604 can be configured to periodically check for updates from the autoconfiguration server so that the end user need not be worried about it.
170
NBG4604 User’s Guide
CHAPTER
18
Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
18.1 Overview
This chapter introduces the UPnP feature in the Web Configurator.
Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a distributed, open networking standard that
uses TCP/IP for simple peer-to-peer network connectivity between devices. A
UPnP device can dynamically join a network, obtain an IP address, convey its
capabilities and learn about other devices on the network. In turn, a device can
leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use.
18.2 What You Can Do
Use the UPnP screen (Section 18.4 on page 172) to enable UPnP on the
NBG4604.
18.3 What You Need to Know
How do I know if I'm using UPnP?
UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder
(Windows XP). Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear
as a separate icon. Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the
information and properties of that device.
NAT Traversal
UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate
through NAT. UPnP network devices can automatically configure network
addressing, announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and
enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions. NAT traversal allows
the following:
NBG4604 User’s Guide
171
Chapter 18 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
• Dynamic port mapping
• Learning public IP addresses
• Assigning lease times to mappings
Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal
and UPnP.
See the NAT chapter for more information on NAT.
Cautions with UPnP
The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own
services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues. Network
information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some
network environments.
When a UPnP device joins a network, it announces its presence with a multicast
message. For security reasons, the NBG4604 allows multicast messages on the
LAN only.
All UPnP-enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without
additional configuration. Disable UPnP if this is not your intention.
18.4 UPnP Screen
Use this screen to enable UPnP. Click the Management > UPnP to open the
following screen.
Figure 97 Management > UPnP > General
172
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 18 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 66 Management > UPnP > General
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Enable the Universal Plug
and Play (UPnP) Feature
Select this check box to activate UPnP. Be aware that anyone
could use a UPnP application to open the Web Configurator's
login screen without entering the NBG4604's IP address
(although you must still enter the password to access the Web
Configurator).
Allow users to make port
forwarding changes
through UPnP
Select this check box to allow UPnP-enabled applications to
automatically configure the NBG4604 so that they can
communicate through the NBG4604, for example by using NAT
traversal, UPnP applications automatically reserve a NAT
forwarding port in order to communicate with another UPnP
enabled device; this eliminates the need to manually configure
port forwarding for the UPnP enabled application.
Apply
Click Apply to save the setting to the NBG4604.
Reset
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
18.5 Technical Reference
The sections show examples of using UPnP.
18.5.1 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example
This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP. You must
already have UPnP installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the NBG4604.
Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the NBG4604. Turn on your
computer and the NBG4604.
18.5.1.1 Auto-discover Your UPnP-enabled Network Device
1
Click start and Control Panel. Double-click Network Connections. An icon
displays under Internet Gateway.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
173
Chapter 18 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
2
Right-click the icon and select Properties.
Figure 98 Network Connections
3
In the Internet Connection Properties window, click Settings to see the port
mappings there were automatically created.
Figure 99 Internet Connection Properties
174
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 18 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
4
You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port
mappings.
Figure 100 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings
Figure 101 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings: Add
Note: When the UPnP-enabled device is disconnected from your computer, all port
mappings will be deleted automatically.
5
Select Show icon in notification area when connected option and click OK.
An icon displays in the system tray.
Figure 102 System Tray Icon
NBG4604 User’s Guide
175
Chapter 18 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
6
Double-click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status.
Figure 103 Internet Connection Status
18.5.2 Web Configurator Easy Access
With UPnP, you can access the web-based configurator on the NBG4604 without
finding out the IP address of the NBG4604 first. This comes helpful if you do not
know the IP address of the NBG4604.
Follow the steps below to access the Web Configurator.
176
1
Click Start and then Control Panel.
2
Double-click Network Connections.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 18 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
3
Select My Network Places under Other Places.
Figure 104 Network Connections
4
An icon with the description for each UPnP-enabled device displays under Local
Network.
5
Right-click on the icon for your NBG4604 and select Invoke. The Web
Configurator login screen displays.
Figure 105 Network Connections: My Network Places
NBG4604 User’s Guide
177
Chapter 18 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
6
Right-click on the icon for your NBG4604 and select Properties. A properties
window displays with basic information about the NBG4604.
Figure 106 Network Connections: My Network Places: Properties: Example
178
NBG4604 User’s Guide
CHAPTER
19
System
19.1 Overview
This chapter provides information on the System screens.
See the chapter about wizard setup for more information on the next few screens.
19.2 What You Can Do
• Use the General screen (Section 19.3 on page 179) to enter a name to identify
the NBG4604 in the network and set the password.
• Use the Time Setting screen (Section 19.4 on page 181) to change your
NBG4604’s time and date.
19.3 System General Screen
Use this screen to enter a name to identify the NBG4604 in the network and set
the password. Click Maintenance > System. The following screen displays.
Figure 107 Maintenance > System > General
NBG4604 User’s Guide
179
Chapter 19 System
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 67 Maintenance > System > General
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
System Setup
System Name
System Name is a unique name to identify the NBG4604 in an
Ethernet network. It is recommended you enter your computer’s
“Computer name” in this field (see the chapter about wizard setup for
how to find your computer’s name).
This name can be up to 30 alphanumeric characters long. Spaces are
not allowed, but dashes “-” and underscores "_" are accepted.
Domain Name
Enter the domain name (if you know it) here. If you leave this field
blank, the ISP may assign a domain name via DHCP.
The domain name entered by you is given priority over the ISP
assigned domain name.
180
Administrator
Inactivity Timer
Type how many minutes a management session can be left idle before
the session times out. The default is 5 minutes. After it times out you
have to log in with your password again. Very long idle timeouts may
have security risks. A value of "0" means a management session never
times out, no matter how long it has been left idle (not
recommended).
Password Setup
Change your NBG4604’s password (recommended) using the fields as
shown.
Old Password
Type the default password or the existing password you use to access
the system in this field.
New Password
Type your new system password (up to 30 characters). Note that as
you type a password, the screen displays an asterisk (*) for each
character you type.
Retype to
Confirm
Type the new password again in this field.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604.
Reset
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 19 System
19.4 Time Setting Screen
To change your NBG4604’s time and date, click Maintenance > System > Time
Setting. The screen appears as shown. Use this screen to configure the
NBG4604’s time based on your local time zone.
Figure 108 Maintenance > System > Time Setting
he following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 68 Maintenance > System > Time Setting
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Current Time and Date
Current Time
This field displays the time of your NBG4604.
Each time you reload this page, the NBG4604 synchronizes the time
with the time server.
Current Date
This field displays the date of your NBG4604.
Each time you reload this page, the NBG4604 synchronizes the date
with the time server.
Time and Date Setup
Manual
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Select this radio button to enter the time and date manually. If you
configure a new time and date, Time Zone and Daylight Saving at the
same time, the new time and date you entered has priority and the
Time Zone and Daylight Saving settings do not affect it.
181
Chapter 19 System
Table 68 Maintenance > System > Time Setting
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
New Time
This field displays the last updated time from the time server or the
last time configured manually.
(hh:mm:ss)
When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new time
in this field and then click Apply.
New Date
(yyyy/mm/dd)
This field displays the last updated date from the time server or the
last date configured manually.
When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new date
in this field and then click Apply.
Get from Time
Server
Select this radio button to have the NBG4604 get the time and date
from the time server you specified below.
Auto
Select Auto to have the NBG4604 automatically search for an
available time server and synchronize the date and time with the time
server after you click Apply.
User Defined
Time Server
Address
Select User Defined Time Server Address and enter the IP
address or URL (up to 20 extended ASCII characters in length) of
your time server. Check with your ISP/network administrator if you
are unsure of this information.
Time Zone Setup
Time Zone
Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time
difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
Daylight Savings
Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many
countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to
give more daytime light in the evening.
Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time.
Start Date
Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you
selected Daylight Savings. The o'clock field uses the 24 hour
format. Here are a couple of examples:
Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the
first Sunday of April. Each time zone in the United States starts using
Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you
would select First, Sunday, April and type 2 in the o'clock field.
Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday
of March. All of the time zones in the European Union start using
Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So
in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, March. The
time you type in the o'clock field depends on your time zone. In
Germany for instance, you would type 2 because Germany's time
zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).
182
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 19 System
Table 68 Maintenance > System > Time Setting
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
End Date
Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you
selected Daylight Savings. The o'clock field uses the 24 hour
format. Here are a couple of examples:
Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the last Sunday of
October. Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight
Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would
select Last, Sunday, October and type 2 in the o'clock field.
Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday
of October. All of the time zones in the European Union stop using
Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So
in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, October. The
time you type in the o'clock field depends on your time zone. In
Germany for instance, you would type 2 because Germany's time
zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604.
Reset
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
183
Chapter 19 System
184
NBG4604 User’s Guide
CHAPTER
20
Logs
20.1 Overview
This chapter contains information about configuring general log settings and
viewing the NBG4604’s logs.
The Web Configurator allows you to look at all of the NBG4604’s logs in one
location.
20.2 What You Can Do
• Use the View Log screen (Section 20.4 on page 186) to see the logs for the
categories such as system maintenance, system errors, access control, allowed
or blocked web sites, blocked web features, and so on.
• Use the Log Settings screen (Section 20.5 on page 187) to send copies of the
NBG4604 syslog files to a dedicated syslog server.
20.3 What You Need to Know
An alert is a type of log that warrants more serious attention. They include system
errors, attacks (access control) and attempted access to blocked web sites or web
sites with restricted web features such as cookies, active X and so on. Some
categories such as System Errors consist of both logs and alerts. You may
differentiate them by their color in the View Log screen. Alerts display in red and
logs display in black.
Alerts are e-mailed as soon as they happen. Logs may be e-mailed as soon as the
log is full (see Log Schedule). Selecting many alert and/or log categories
(especially Access Control) may result in many e-mails being sent.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
185
Chapter 20 Logs
20.4 View Log Screen
Use the View Log screen to see the logged messages for the NBG4604. Options
include logs about system maintenance, system errors, access control, allowed or
blocked web sites, blocked web features (such as ActiveX controls, Java and
cookies), attacks (such as DoS) and IPSec.
Log entries in red indicate system error logs. The log wraps around and deletes
the old entries after it fills. Click a column heading to sort the entries. A triangle
indicates ascending or descending sort order.
Click Maintenance > Logs to open the View Log screen.
Figure 109 Maintenance > Logs > View Log
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 69 Maintenance > Logs > View Log
186
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Refresh
Click Refresh to renew the log screen.
Clear Log
Click Clear Log to delete all the logs.
#
This is the index number of the log entry.
Time
This field displays the time the log was recorded. See the chapter on
system maintenance and information to configure the NBG4604’s
time and date.
Message
This field states the reason for the log.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 20 Logs
20.5 Log Settings Screen
Use this screen to send copies of the NBG4604 syslog files to a dedicated syslog
server. For information on setting up a syslog server, consult the documentation
that came with your syslog server product.
Click Maintenance > Logs > Log Settings to open this screen.
Figure 110 Maintenance > Logs > Log Settings
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 70 Maintenance > Logs > Log Settings
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Active
Select this to enable syslog logging on this device.
Syslog Server IP
Address
Enter the IP address of the syslog server to receive syslogs from this
device.
Apply
Click Apply to save the setting to the NBG4604.
Reset
Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
187
Chapter 20 Logs
188
NBG4604 User’s Guide
CHAPTER
21
Tools
21.1 Overview
This chapter shows you how to upload a new firmware, upload or save backup
configuration files and restart the NBG4604.
21.2 What You Can Do
• Use the Firmware screen (Section 21.3 on page 189) to upload firmware to
your NBG4604.
• Use the Configuration screen (Section 21.4 on page 192) to view information
related to factory defaults, backup configuration, and restoring configuration.
• Use the Restart screen (Section 21.5 on page 194) to have the NBG4604
reboot.
21.3 Firmware Upload Screen
Find firmware at www.zyxel.com in a file that (usually) uses the system model
name with a “*.bin” extension, e.g., “NBG4604.bin”. The upload process uses
HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) and may take up to two minutes. After a
successful upload, the system will reboot.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
189
Chapter 21 Tools
Click Maintenance > Tools. Follow the instructions in this screen to upload
firmware to your NBG4604.
Figure 111 Maintenance > Tools > Firmware
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 71 Maintenance > Tools > Firmware
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
File Path
Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click
Browse... to find it.
Browse...
Click Browse... to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that
you must decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them.
Upload
Click Upload to begin the upload process. This process may take up to
two minutes.
Note: Do not turn off the NBG4604 while firmware upload is in progress!
After you see the Firmware Upload In Process screen, wait two minutes before
logging into the NBG4604 again.
Figure 112 Upload Warning
190
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 21 Tools
The NBG4604 automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network
disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your
desktop.
Figure 113 Network Temporarily Disconnected
After two minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the
Status screen.
If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click Return to
go back to the Firmware screen.
Figure 114 Upload Error Message
NBG4604 User’s Guide
191
Chapter 21 Tools
21.4 Configuration Screen
Click Maintenance > Tools > Configuration. Information related to factory
defaults, backup configuration, and restoring configuration appears as shown
next.
Figure 115 Maintenance > Tools > Configuration
21.4.1 Backup Configuration
Backup configuration allows you to back up (save) the NBG4604’s current
configuration to a file on your computer. Once your NBG4604 is configured and
functioning properly, it is highly recommended that you back up your configuration
file before making configuration changes. The backup configuration file will be
useful in case you need to return to your previous settings.
Click Backup to save the NBG4604’s current configuration to your computer.
192
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 21 Tools
21.4.2 Restore Configuration
Restore configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved
configuration file from your computer to your NBG4604.
Table 72 Maintenance Restore Configuration
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
File Path
Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click
Browse... to find it.
Browse...
Click Browse... to find the file you want to upload. Remember that you
must decompress compressed (.ZIP) files before you can upload them.
Upload
Click Upload to begin the upload process.
Note: Do not turn off the NBG4604 while configuration file upload is in progress
After you see a “configuration upload successful” screen, you must then wait one
minute before logging into the NBG4604 again.
Figure 116 Configuration Restore Successful
The NBG4604 automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network
disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your
desktop.
Figure 117 Temporarily Disconnected
If you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP
address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default
NBG4604 IP address (192.168.1.1). See Appendix C on page 231 for details on
how to set up your computer’s IP address.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
193
Chapter 21 Tools
If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click Return to
go back to the Configuration screen.
Figure 118 Configuration Restore Error
21.4.3 Back to Factory Defaults
Pressing the Reset button in this section clears all user-entered configuration
information and returns the NBG4604 to its factory defaults.
You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory
defaults of your NBG4604. Refer to the chapter about introducing the Web
Configurator for more information on the RESET button.
21.5 Restart Screen
System restart allows you to reboot the NBG4604 without turning the power off.
Click Maintenance > Tools > Restart. Click Restart to have the NBG4604
reboot. This does not affect the NBG4604's configuration.
Figure 119 Maintenance > Tools > Restart
194
NBG4604 User’s Guide
CHAPTER
22
Sys OP Mode
22.1 Overview
The Sys OP Mode (System Operation Mode) function lets you configure whether
your NBG4604 is a router or AP.
You can choose between Router Mode and AP Mode depending on your network
topology and the features you require from your device. See Section 1.1 on page
21 for more information on which mode to choose.
Note: The Sys OP Mode screen is read-only if you are accessing from the admin
level account .
22.2 What You Can Do
Use the General screen (Section 22.4 on page 197) to select how you connect to
the Internet.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
195
Chapter 22 Sys OP Mode
22.3 What You Need to Know
Router
A router connects your local network with another network, such as the Internet.
The router has two IP addresses, the LAN IP address and the WAN IP address.
Figure 120 LAN and WAN IP Addresses in Router Mode
AP
An AP extends one network and so has just one IP address. All Ethernet ports on
the AP have the same IP address. To connect to the Internet, another device, such
as a router, is required.
Figure 121 IP Address in AP Mode
196
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 22 Sys OP Mode
22.4 General Screen
Use this screen to select how you connect to the Internet.
Figure 122 Maintenance > Sys OP Mode > General
If you select Router Mode, the following pop-up message window appears.
Figure 123 Maintenance > Sys Op Mode > General: Router
• In this mode there are both LAN and WAN ports. The LAN Ethernet and WAN
Ethernet ports have different IP addresses.
• The DHCP server on your device is enabled and allocates IP addresses to other
devices on your local network.
• The LAN IP address of the device on the local network is set to 192.168.1.1.
• You can configure the IP address settings on your WAN port. Contact your ISP or
system administrator for more information on appropriate settings.
If you select Access Point the following pop-up message window appears.
Figure 124 Maintenance > Sys Op Mode > General: AP
• In AP Mode all Ethernet ports have the same IP address.
• All ports on the rear panel of the device are LAN ports, including the port labeled
WAN. There is no WAN port.
• The DHCP server on your device is disabled. In AP mode there must be a device
with a DHCP server on your network such as a router or gateway which can
allocate IP addresses.
The IP address of the device on the local network is set to 192.168.1.2.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
197
Chapter 22 Sys OP Mode
The following table describes the labels in the General screen.
Table 73 Maintenance > Sys OP Mode > General
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
System Operation Mode
Router
Select Router if your device routes traffic between a local network and
another network such as the Internet. This mode offers services such as a
firewall or content filter.
Access Point
Select Access Point if your device bridges traffic between clients on the
same network.
Apply
Click Apply to save your settings.
Reset
Click Reset to return your settings to the default (Router)
Note: If you select the incorrect System Operation Mode you cannot connect to the
Internet.
198
NBG4604 User’s Guide
CHAPTER
23
Language
23.1 Language Screen
Use this screen to change the language for the Web Configurator display.
Click the language you prefer. The Web Configurator language changes after a
while without restarting the NBG4604.
Figure 125 Language
NBG4604 User’s Guide
199
Chapter 23 Language
200
NBG4604 User’s Guide
CHAPTER
24
Troubleshooting
This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The
potential problems are divided into the following categories.
• Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs
• NBG4604 Access and Login
• Internet Access
• Resetting the NBG4604 to Its Factory Defaults
• Wireless Router/AP Troubleshooting
24.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs
The NBG4604 does not turn on. None of the LEDs turn on.
1
Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the NBG4604.
2
Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the NBG4604 and plugged in
to an appropriate power source. Make sure the power source is turned on.
3
Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor or cord to the NBG4604.
4
If the problem continues, contact the vendor.
One of the LEDs does not behave as expected.
1
Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Section 1.5 on
page 22.
2
Check the hardware connections. See the Quick Start Guide.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
201
Chapter 24 Troubleshooting
3
Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged
cables.
4
Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor to the NBG4604.
5
If the problem continues, contact the vendor.
24.2 NBG4604 Access and Login
I don’t know the IP address of my NBG4604.
1
The default IP address is 192.168.1.1.
2
If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, you might get the IP address
of the NBG4604 by looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your
computer. To do this in most Windows computers, click Start > Run, enter cmd,
and then enter ipconfig. The IP address of the Default Gateway might be the IP
address of the NBG4604 (it depends on the network), so enter this IP address in
your Internet browser.Set your device to Router Mode, login (see the Quick Start
Guide for instructions) and go to the Device Information table in the Status
screen. Your NBG4604’s IP address is available in the Device Information table.
• If the DHCP setting under LAN information is None, your device has a fixed
IP address.
• If the DHCP setting under LAN information is Client, then your device
receives an IP address from a DHCP server on the network.
3
If your NBG4604 is a DHCP client, you can find your IP address from the DHCP
server. This information is only available from the DHCP server which allocates IP
addresses on your network. Find this information directly from the DHCP server or
contact your system administrator for more information.
4
Reset your NBG4604 to change all settings back to their default. This means your
current settings are lost. See Section 24.4 on page 205 in the Troubleshooting
for information on resetting your NBG4604.
I forgot the password.
1
202
The default password is 1234.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 24 Troubleshooting
2
If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See
Section 24.4 on page 205.
I cannot see or access the Login screen in the Web Configurator.
1
Make sure you are using the correct IP address.
• The default IP address is 192.168.1.1.
• If you changed the IP address (Section 7.3 on page 102), use the new IP
address.
• If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting
suggestions for I don’t know the IP address of my NBG4604.
2
Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as
expected. See the Quick Start Guide.
3
Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has
JavaScript and Java enabled. See Appendix B on page 223.
4
Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the NBG4604. (If you know
that there are routers between your computer and the NBG4604, skip this step.)
• If there is a DHCP server on your network, make sure your computer is using
a dynamic IP address. See Section 7.3 on page 102.
• If there is no DHCP server on your network, make sure your computer’s IP
address is in the same subnet as the NBG4604. See Section 7.3 on page 102.
5
Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the NBG4604 with the
default IP address. See Section 7.3 on page 102.
6
If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one
of the advanced suggestions.
Advanced Suggestions
• If your computer is connected to the WAN port or is connected wirelessly, use a
computer that is connected to a LAN/ETHERNET port.
I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the NBG4604.
1
Make sure you have entered the password correctly. The default password is
1234. This field is case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
203
Chapter 24 Troubleshooting
2
This can happen when you fail to log out properly from your last session. Try
logging in again after 5 minutes.
3
Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor or cord to the NBG4604.
4
If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See
Section 24.4 on page 205.
24.3 Internet Access
I cannot access the Internet.
1
Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as
expected. See the Quick Start Guide.
2
Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly in the wizard. These
fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on.
3
If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure the wireless settings
in the wireless client are the same as the settings in the AP.
• Go to Network > Wireless LAN > General > WDS and check if the NBG4604 is
set to bridge mode. Select Disable and try to connect to the Internet again.
4
Disconnect all the cables from your device, and follow the directions in the Quick
Start Guide again.
5
Go to Maintenance > Sys OP Mode > General. Check your System Operation Mode
setting.
• Select Router if your device routes traffic between a local network and
another network such as the Internet.
• Select Access Point if your device bridges traffic between clients on the
same network.
6
If the problem continues, contact your ISP.
I cannot access the Internet anymore. I had access to the Internet (with the
NBG4604), but my Internet connection is not available anymore.
204
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 24 Troubleshooting
1
Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as
expected. See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1.5 on page 22.
2
Reboot the NBG4604.
3
If the problem continues, contact your ISP.
The Internet connection is slow or intermittent.
1
There might be a lot of traffic on the network. Look at the LEDs, and check Section
1.5 on page 22. If the NBG4604 is sending or receiving a lot of information, try
closing some programs that use the Internet, especially peer-to-peer applications.
2
Check the signal strength. If the signal strength is low, try moving the NBG4604
closer to the AP if possible, and look around to see if there are any devices that
might be interfering with the wireless network (for example, microwaves, other
wireless networks, and so on).
3
Reboot the NBG4604.
4
If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one
of the advanced suggestions.
Advanced Suggestion
• Check the settings for QoS. If it is disabled, you might consider activating it.
24.4 Resetting the NBG4604 to Its Factory
Defaults
If you reset the NBG4604, you lose all of the changes you have made. The
NBG4604 re-loads its default settings, and the password resets to 1234. You have
to make all of your changes again.
You will lose all of your changes when you push the RESET button.
To reset the NBG4604,
1
Make sure the power LED is on.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
205
Chapter 24 Troubleshooting
2
Press the RESET button for longer than 1 second to restart/reboot the NBG4604.
3
Press the RESET button for longer than five seconds to set the NBG4604 back to
its factory-default configurations.
If the NBG4604 restarts automatically, wait for the NBG4604 to finish restarting,
and log in to the Web Configurator. The password is “1234”.
If the NBG4604 does not restart automatically, disconnect and reconnect the
NBG4604’s power. Then, follow the directions above again.
24.5 Wireless Router/AP Troubleshooting
I cannot access the NBG4604 or ping any computer from the WLAN (wireless AP
or router).
1
Make sure the wireless LAN is enabled on the NBG4604
2
Make sure the wireless adapter on the wireless station is working properly.
3
Make sure the wireless adapter installed on your computer is IEEE 802.11
compatible and supports the same wireless standard as the NBG4604.
4
Make sure your computer (with a wireless adapter installed) is within the
transmission range of the NBG4604.
5
Check that both the NBG4604 and your wireless station are using the same
wireless and wireless security settings.
6
Make sure traffic between the WLAN and the LAN is not blocked by the firewall on
the NBG4604.
7
Make sure you allow the NBG4604 to be remotely accessed through the WLAN
interface. Check your remote management settings.
• See the chapter on Wireless LAN in the User’s Guide for more information.
to select Router Mode.
I set up URL keyword blocking, but I can still access a website that should be
blocked.
206
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 24 Troubleshooting
Make sure that you select the Enable URL Keyword Blocking check box in the
Content Filtering screen. Make sure that the keywords that you type are listed in
the Keyword List.
If a keyword that is listed in the Keyword List is not blocked when it is found in a
URL, customize the keyword blocking using commands. See the Customizing
Keyword Blocking URL Checking section in the Content Filter chapter.
I can access the Internet, but I cannot open my network folders.
In the Network > LAN > Advanced screen, make sure Allow between LAN and
WAN is checked. This is not checked by default to keep the LAN secure.
If you still cannot access a network folder, make sure your account has access
rights to the folder you are trying to open.
I can access the Web Configurator after I switched to AP mode.
When you change from router mode to AP mode, your computer must have an IP
address in the range between “192.168.1.3” and “192.168.1.254”.
Refer to Appendix C on page 231 for instructions on how to change your
computer’s IP address.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
207
Chapter 24 Troubleshooting
208
NBG4604 User’s Guide
CHAPTER
25
Product Specifications
The following tables summarize the NBG4604’s hardware and firmware features.
Table 74 Hardware Features
Dimensions (W x D x
H)
140 mm x 110 mm x 30 mm
Weight
190 g
Power Specification
Input: 100-240 AC, 50/60 Hz
Output: 12 V DC 1A
Ethernet ports
Auto-negotiating: 10/100/1000 Mbps in either half-duplex or fullduplex mode.
Auto-crossover: Use either crossover or straight-through Ethernet
cables.
4-5 Port Switch
A combination of switch and router makes your NBG4604 a costeffective and viable network solution. You can add up to four
computers to the NBG4604 without the cost of a hub when
connecting to the Internet through the WAN port. You can add up
to five computers to the NBG4604 when you connect to the
Internet in AP mode. Add more than four computers to your LAN
by using a hub.
LEDs
PWR, LAN1-4, WAN, WLAN, WPS
Reset Button
The reset button is built into the rear panel. Use this button to
restore the NBG4604 to its factory default settings. Press for 1
second to restart the device. Press for 5 seconds to restore to
factory default settings.
WPS button
Press the WPS on two WPS enabled devices within 120 seconds
for a security-enabled wireless connection.
Antenna
The NBG4604 is equipped with a 2dBi (2.4GHz) detachable
antenna to provide clear radio transmission and reception on the
wireless network.
Operation
Environment
Temperature: 0º C ~ 40º C / 32ºF ~ 104ºF
Storage Environment
Temperature: -30º C ~ 70º C / -22ºF ~ 158ºF
Humidity: 20% ~ 90%
Humidity: 20% ~ 95%
NBG4604 User’s Guide
209
Chapter 25 Product Specifications
Table 75 Firmware Features
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
Default LAN IP Address
192.168.1.1 (router)
192.168.1.2. (AP)
Default LAN Subnet
Mask
255.255.255.0 (24 bits)
Default Password
1234
DHCP Pool
192.168.1.33 to 192.168.1.64
Wireless Interface
Wireless LAN
Default Wireless SSID
ZyXEL
Device Management
Use the Web Configurator to easily configure the rich range of
features on the NBG4604.
Wireless Functionality
Allows IEEE 802.11b and/or IEEE 802.11g wireless clients to
connect to the NBG4604 wirelessly. Enable wireless security (
WPA(2)-PSK) and/or MAC filtering to protect your wireless
network.
Note: The NBG4604 may be prone to RF (Radio
Frequency) interference from other 2.4 GHz devices
such as microwave ovens, wireless phones,
Bluetooth enabled devices, and other wireless LANs.
Firmware Upgrade
Download new firmware (when available) from the ZyXEL web
site and use the Web Configurator to put it on the NBG4604.
Note: Only upload firmware for your specific model!
Configuration Backup &
Restoration
Make a copy of the NBG4604’s configuration and put it back on
the NBG4604 later if you decide you want to revert back to an
earlier configuration.
Network Address
Translation (NAT)
Each computer on your network must have its own unique IP
address. Use NAT to convert a single public IP address to
multiple private IP addresses for the computers on your
network.
Firewall
You can configure firewall on the NBG4604 for secure Internet
access. When the firewall is on, by default, all incoming traffic
from the Internet to your network is blocked unless it is
initiated from your network. This means that probes from the
outside to your network are not allowed, but you can safely
browse the Internet and download files for example.
Content Filter
The NBG4604 blocks or allows access to web sites that you
specify and blocks access to web sites with URLs that contain
keywords that you specify. You can define time periods and
days during which content filtering is enabled. You can also
include or exclude particular computers on your network from
content filtering.
You can also subscribe to category-based content filtering that
allows your NBG4604 to check web sites against an external
database.
210
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Chapter 25 Product Specifications
Table 75 Firmware Features
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
Bandwidth Management
You can efficiently manage traffic on your network by reserving
bandwidth and giving priority to certain types of traffic and/or
to particular computers.
Remote Management
This allows you to decide whether a service (HTTP or FTP traffic
for example) from a computer on a network (LAN or WAN for
example) can access the NBG4604.
Wireless LAN Scheduler
You can schedule the times the Wireless LAN is enabled/
disabled.
Time and Date
Get the current time and date from an external server when
you turn on your NBG4604. You can also set the time manually.
These dates and times are then used in logs.
Port Forwarding
If you have a server (mail or web server for example) on your
network, then use this feature to let people access it from the
Internet.
DHCP (Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol)
Use this feature to have the NBG4604 assign IP addresses, an
IP default gateway and DNS servers to computers on your
network.
Dynamic DNS Support
With Dynamic DNS (Domain Name System) support, you can
use a fixed URL, www.zyxel.com for example, with a dynamic
IP address. You must register for this service with a Dynamic
DNS service provider.
IP Multicast
IP Multicast is used to send traffic to a specific group of
computers. The NBG4604 supports versions 1 and 2 of IGMP
(Internet Group Management Protocol) used to join multicast
groups (see RFC 2236).
Logging
Use logs for troubleshooting. You can view logs in the Web
Configurator.
PPPoE
PPPoE mimics a dial-up Internet access connection.
PPTP Encapsulation
Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) enables secure
transfer of data through a Virtual Private Network (VPN). The
NBG4604 supports one PPTP connection at a time.
Universal Plug and Play
(UPnP)
The NBG4604 can communicate with other UPnP enabled
devices in a network.
25.1 Wall-mounting Instructions
Complete the following steps to hang your NBG4604 on a wall.
1
Select a position free of obstructions on a sturdy wall.
2
Drill two holes for the screws.
Be careful to avoid damaging pipes or cables located inside the
wall when drilling holes for the screws.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
211
Chapter 25 Product Specifications
3
Do not insert the screws all the way into the wall. Leave a small gap of about 0.5
cm between the heads of the screws and the wall.
4
Make sure the screws are snugly fastened to the wall. They need to hold the
weight of the NBG4604 with the connection cables.
5
Align the holes on the back of the NBG4604 with the screws on the wall. Hang the
NBG4604 on the screws.
Figure 126 Wall-mounting Example
The following are dimensions of an M4 tap screw and masonry plug used for wall
mounting. All measurements are in millimeters (mm).
Figure 127 Masonry Plug and M4 Tap Screw
212
NBG4604 User’s Guide
APPENDIX
A
IP Addresses and Subnetting
This appendix introduces IP addresses and subnet masks.
IP addresses identify individual devices on a network. Every networking device
(including computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to
communicate across the network. These networking devices are also known as
hosts.
Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network.
You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub-networks.
Introduction to IP Addresses
One part of the IP address is the network number, and the other part is the host
ID. In the same way that houses on a street share a common street name, the
hosts on a network share a common network number. Similarly, as each house
has its own house number, each host on the network has its own unique
identifying number - the host ID. Routers use the network number to send packets
to the correct network, while the host ID determines to which host on the network
the packets are delivered.
Structure
An IP address is made up of four parts, written in dotted decimal notation (for
example, 192.168.1.1). Each of these four parts is known as an octet. An octet is
an eight-digit binary number (for example 11000000, which is 192 in decimal
notation).
Therefore, each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary, or
0 to 255 in decimal.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
213
Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting
The following figure shows an example IP address in which the first three octets
(192.168.1) are the network number, and the fourth octet (16) is the host ID.
Figure 128 Network Number and Host ID
How much of the IP address is the network number and how much is the host ID
varies according to the subnet mask.
Subnet Masks
A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number,
and which bits are part of the host ID (using a logical AND operation). The term
“subnet” is short for “sub-network”.
A subnet mask has 32 bits. If a bit in the subnet mask is a “1” then the
corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number. If a bit in the
subnet mask is “0” then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host
ID.
The following example shows a subnet mask identifying the network number (in
bold text) and host ID of an IP address (192.168.1.2 in decimal).
Table 76 Subnet Mask - Identifying Network Number
214
1ST
OCTET:
2ND
OCTET:
3RD
OCTET:
4TH
OCTET
(192)
(168)
(1)
(2)
IP Address (Binary)
11000000
10101000
00000001
00000010
Subnet Mask (Binary)
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting
Table 76 Subnet Mask - Identifying Network Number
Network Number
1ST
OCTET:
2ND
OCTET:
3RD
OCTET:
4TH
OCTET
(192)
(168)
(1)
(2)
11000000
10101000
00000001
Host ID
00000010
By convention, subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones
beginning from the leftmost bit of the mask, followed by a continuous sequence of
zeros, for a total number of 32 bits.
Subnet masks can be referred to by the size of the network number part (the bits
with a “1” value). For example, an “8-bit mask” means that the first 8 bits of the
mask are ones and the remaining 24 bits are zeroes.
Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses. The
following examples show the binary and decimal notation for 8-bit, 16-bit, 24-bit
and 29-bit subnet masks.
Table 77 Subnet Masks
BINARY
1ST
OCTET
2ND
OCTET
3RD
OCTET
4TH
OCTET
DECIMAL
8-bit mask
11111111
00000000
00000000
00000000
255.0.0.0
16-bit
mask
11111111
11111111
00000000
00000000
255.255.0.0
24-bit
mask
11111111
11111111
11111111
00000000
255.255.255.0
29-bit
mask
11111111
11111111
11111111
11111000
255.255.255.24
8
Network Size
The size of the network number determines the maximum number of possible
hosts you can have on your network. The larger the number of network number
bits, the smaller the number of remaining host ID bits.
An IP address with host IDs of all zeros is the IP address of the network
(192.168.1.0 with a 24-bit subnet mask, for example). An IP address with host
IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that network (192.168.1.255 with a
24-bit subnet mask, for example).
NBG4604 User’s Guide
215
Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting
As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts, calculate the
maximum number of possible hosts in a network as follows:
Table 78 Maximum Host Numbers
SUBNET MASK
HOST ID SIZE
8 bits
24 bits
255.0.0.0
16 bits 255.255.0.0
24 bits 255.255.255.0
29 bits 255.255.255.2
48
16 bits
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF
HOSTS
224 – 2
16
2
16777214
–2
65534
8
8 bits
2 –2
254
3 bits
23
6
–2
Notation
Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left,
followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask,
you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each
octet. This is usually specified by writing a “/” followed by the number of bits in
the mask after the address.
For example, 192.1.1.0 /25 is equivalent to saying 192.1.1.0 with subnet mask
255.255.255.128.
The following table shows some possible subnet masks using both notations.
Table 79 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation
216
SUBNET
MASK
ALTERNATIVE LAST OCTET
NOTATION
(BINARY)
LAST OCTET
(DECIMAL)
255.255.255.0
/24
0000 0000
0
255.255.255.12 /25
8
1000 0000
128
255.255.255.19 /26
2
1100 0000
192
255.255.255.22 /27
4
1110 0000
224
255.255.255.24 /28
0
1111 0000
240
255.255.255.24 /29
8
1111 1000
248
255.255.255.25 /30
2
1111 1100
252
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting
Subnetting
You can use subnetting to divide one network into multiple sub-networks. In the
following example a network administrator creates two sub-networks to isolate a
group of servers from the rest of the company network for security reasons.
In this example, the company network address is 192.168.1.0. The first three
octets of the address (192.168.1) are the network number, and the remaining
octet is the host ID, allowing a maximum of 28 – 2 or 254 possible hosts.
The following figure shows the company network before subnetting.
Figure 129 Subnetting Example: Before Subnetting
You can “borrow” one of the host ID bits to divide the network 192.168.1.0 into
two separate sub-networks. The subnet mask is now 25 bits (255.255.255.128 or
/25).
The “borrowed” host ID bit can have a value of either 0 or 1, allowing two
subnets; 192.168.1.0 /25 and 192.168.1.128 /25.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
217
Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting
The following figure shows the company network after subnetting. There are now
two sub-networks, A and B.
Figure 130 Subnetting Example: After Subnetting
In a 25-bit subnet the host ID has 7 bits, so each sub-network has a maximum of
27 – 2 or 126 possible hosts (a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet’s address itself,
all ones is the subnet’s broadcast address).
192.168.1.0 with mask 255.255.255.128 is subnet A itself, and 192.168.1.127
with mask 255.255.255.128 is its broadcast address. Therefore, the lowest IP
address that can be assigned to an actual host for subnet A is 192.168.1.1 and
the highest is 192.168.1.126.
Similarly, the host ID range for subnet B is 192.168.1.129 to 192.168.1.254.
Example: Four Subnets
The previous example illustrated using a 25-bit subnet mask to divide a 24-bit
address into two subnets. Similarly, to divide a 24-bit address into four subnets,
you need to “borrow” two host ID bits to give four possible combinations (00, 01,
10 and 11). The subnet mask is 26 bits
(11111111.11111111.11111111.11000000) or 255.255.255.192.
218
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting
Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits, giving 26 - 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet (a
host ID of all zeroes is the subnet itself, all ones is the subnet’s broadcast
address).
Table 80 Subnet 1
IP/SUBNET MASK
NETWORK NUMBER
LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
IP Address (Decimal)
192.168.1.
0
IP Address (Binary)
11000000.10101000.00000001.
00000000
Subnet Mask (Binary)
11111111.11111111.11111111.
11000000
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.0
Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.1
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.63
Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.62
Table 81 Subnet 2
IP/SUBNET MASK
NETWORK NUMBER
LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
IP Address
192.168.1.
64
IP Address (Binary)
11000000.10101000.00000001.
01000000
Subnet Mask (Binary)
11111111.11111111.11111111.
11000000
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.64
Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.65
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.127
Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.126
Table 82 Subnet 3
IP/SUBNET MASK
NETWORK NUMBER
LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
IP Address
192.168.1.
128
IP Address (Binary)
11000000.10101000.00000001.
10000000
Subnet Mask (Binary)
11111111.11111111.11111111.
11000000
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.128
Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.129
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.191
Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.190
Table 83 Subnet 4
IP/SUBNET MASK
NETWORK NUMBER
LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
IP Address
192.168.1.
192
IP Address (Binary)
11000000.10101000.00000001
.
11000000
Subnet Mask (Binary)
11111111.11111111.11111111
.
11000000
NBG4604 User’s Guide
219
Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting
Table 83 Subnet 4 (continued)
LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
IP/SUBNET MASK
NETWORK NUMBER
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.192
Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.193
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.255
Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.254
Example: Eight Subnets
Similarly, use a 27-bit mask to create eight subnets (000, 001, 010, 011, 100,
101, 110 and 111).
The following table shows IP address last octet values for each subnet.
Table 84 Eight Subnets
SUBNET
SUBNET
ADDRESS
FIRST ADDRESS
LAST
ADDRESS
BROADCAST
ADDRESS
1
0
1
30
31
2
32
33
62
63
3
64
65
94
95
4
96
97
126
127
5
128
129
158
159
6
160
161
190
191
7
192
193
222
223
8
224
225
254
255
Subnet Planning
The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 24-bit
network number.
Table 85 24-bit Network Number Subnet Planning
220
NO. “BORROWED”
HOST BITS
SUBNET MASK
NO. SUBNETS NO. HOSTS PER
SUBNET
1
255.255.255.128 (/25)
2
126
2
255.255.255.192 (/26)
4
62
3
255.255.255.224 (/27)
8
30
4
255.255.255.240 (/28)
16
14
5
255.255.255.248 (/29)
32
6
6
255.255.255.252 (/30)
64
2
7
255.255.255.254 (/31)
128
1
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting
The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 16-bit
network number.
Table 86 16-bit Network Number Subnet Planning
NO. “BORROWED”
HOST BITS
SUBNET MASK
NO. HOSTS PER
NO. SUBNETS SUBNET
1
255.255.128.0 (/17)
2
32766
2
255.255.192.0 (/18)
4
16382
3
255.255.224.0 (/19)
8
8190
4
255.255.240.0 (/20)
16
4094
5
255.255.248.0 (/21)
32
2046
6
255.255.252.0 (/22)
64
1022
7
255.255.254.0 (/23)
128
510
8
255.255.255.0 (/24)
256
254
9
255.255.255.128 (/25)
512
126
10
255.255.255.192 (/26)
1024
62
11
255.255.255.224 (/27)
2048
30
12
255.255.255.240 (/28)
4096
14
13
255.255.255.248 (/29)
8192
6
14
255.255.255.252 (/30)
16384
2
15
255.255.255.254 (/31)
32768
1
Configuring IP Addresses
Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If
the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP
addresses, follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet
mask.
If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you
have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when
the connection is established. If this is the case, it is recommended that you select
a network number from 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.0. The Internet Assigned
Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for private
use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. You must
also enable Network Address Translation (NAT) on the NBG4604.
Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address for your
NBG4604 that is easy to remember (for instance, 192.168.1.1) but make sure
that no other device on your network is using that IP address.
The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your
NBG4604 will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address
NBG4604 User’s Guide
221
Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting
that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by the
NBG4604 unless you are instructed to do otherwise.
Private IP Addresses
Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are
isolated from the Internet (running only between two branch offices, for example)
you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the
Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has reserved the following three
blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:
• 10.0.0.0
• 172.16.0.0
— 10.255.255.255
— 172.31.255.255
• 192.168.0.0 — 192.168.255.255
You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP, or it can be assigned
from a private network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet
access is through an ISP, the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for
your local networks. On the other hand, if you are part of a much larger
organization, you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP
addresses.
Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address;
always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment,
please refer to RFC 1597, Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466,
Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space.
222
NBG4604 User’s Guide
APPENDIX
B
Pop-up Windows, JavaScript
and Java Permissions
In order to use the Web Configurator you need to allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows from your device.
• JavaScript (enabled by default).
• Java permissions (enabled by default).
Note: Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here. Screens for other Internet Explorer
versions may vary.
Internet Explorer Pop-up Blockers
You may have to disable pop-up blocking to log into your device.
Either disable pop-up blocking (enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service
Pack) 2) or allow pop-up blocking and create an exception for your device’s IP
address.
Disable pop-up Blockers
1
In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Pop-up Blocker and then select Turn Off
Pop-up Blocker.
Figure 131 Pop-up Blocker
You can also check if pop-up blocking is disabled in the Pop-up Blocker section in
the Privacy tab.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
223
Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions
1
In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options, Privacy.
2
Clear the Block pop-ups check box in the Pop-up Blocker section of the screen.
This disables any web pop-up blockers you may have enabled.
Figure 132 Internet Options: Privacy
3
Click Apply to save this setting.
Enable pop-up Blockers with Exceptions
Alternatively, if you only want to allow pop-up windows from your device, see the
following steps.
1
224
In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options and then the Privacy tab.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions
2
Select Settings…to open the Pop-up Blocker Settings screen.
Figure 133 Internet Options: Privacy
3
Type the IP address of your device (the web page that you do not want to have
blocked) with the prefix “http://”. For example, http://192.168.167.1.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
225
Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions
4
Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites.
Figure 134 Pop-up Blocker Settings
5
Click Close to return to the Privacy screen.
6
Click Apply to save this setting.
JavaScript
If pages of the Web Configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer,
check that JavaScript are allowed.
226
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions
1
In Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab.
Figure 135 Internet Options: Security
2
Click the Custom Level... button.
3
Scroll down to Scripting.
4
Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected (the default).
5
Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected (the
default).
NBG4604 User’s Guide
227
Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions
6
Click OK to close the window.
Figure 136 Security Settings - Java Scripting
Java Permissions
228
1
From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security
tab.
2
Click the Custom Level... button.
3
Scroll down to Microsoft VM.
4
Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions
5
Click OK to close the window.
Figure 137 Security Settings - Java
JAVA (Sun)
1
From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Advanced
tab.
2
Make sure that Use Java 2 for <applet> under Java (Sun) is selected.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
229
Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScript and Java Permissions
3
Click OK to close the window.
Figure 138 Java (Sun)
230
NBG4604 User’s Guide
APPENDIX
C
Setting up Your Computer’s IP
Address
All computers must have a 10M or 100M Ethernet adapter card and TCP/IP
installed.
Windows 95/98/Me/NT/2000/XP, Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems and
all versions of UNIX/LINUX include the software components you need to install
and use TCP/IP on your computer. Windows 3.1 requires the purchase of a thirdparty TCP/IP application package.
TCP/IP should already be installed on computers using Windows NT/2000/XP,
Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems.
After the appropriate TCP/IP components are installed, configure the TCP/IP
settings in order to "communicate" with your network.
If you manually assign IP information instead of using dynamic assignment, make
sure that your computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet
as the Prestige’s LAN port.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
231
Appendix C Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Windows 95/98/Me
Click Start, Settings, Control Panel and double-click the Network icon to open
the Network window.
Figure 139 WIndows 95/98/Me: Network: Configuration
Installing Components
The Network window Configuration tab displays a list of installed components.
You need a network adapter, the TCP/IP protocol and Client for Microsoft
Networks.
If you need the adapter:
1
In the Network window, click Add.
2
Select Adapter and then click Add.
3
Select the manufacturer and model of your network adapter and then click OK.
If you need TCP/IP:
232
1
In the Network window, click Add.
2
Select Protocol and then click Add.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Appendix C Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
3
Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers.
4
Select TCP/IP from the list of network protocols and then click OK.
If you need Client for Microsoft Networks:
1
Click Add.
2
Select Client and then click Add.
3
Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers.
4
Select Client for Microsoft Networks from the list of network clients and then
click OK.
5
Restart your computer so the changes you made take effect.
Configuring
1
In the Network window Configuration tab, select your network adapter's TCP/IP
entry and click Properties
2
Click the IP Address tab.
• If your IP address is dynamic, select Obtain an IP address automatically.
• If you have a static IP address, select Specify an IP address and type your
information into the IP Address and Subnet Mask fields.
Figure 140 Windows 95/98/Me: TCP/IP Properties: IP Address
NBG4604 User’s Guide
233
Appendix C Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
3
Click the DNS Configuration tab.
• If you do not know your DNS information, select Disable DNS.
• If you know your DNS information, select Enable DNS and type the
information in the fields below (you may not need to fill them all in).
Figure 141 Windows 95/98/Me: TCP/IP Properties: DNS Configuration
4
Click the Gateway tab.
• If you do not know your gateway’s IP address, remove previously installed
gateways.
• If you have a gateway IP address, type it in the New gateway field and click
Add.
5
Click OK to save and close the TCP/IP Properties window.
6
Click OK to close the Network window. Insert the Windows CD if prompted.
7
Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer when prompted.
Verifying Settings
234
1
Click Start and then Run.
2
In the Run window, type "winipcfg" and then click OK to open the IP
Configuration window.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Appendix C Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
3
Select your network adapter. You should see your computer's IP address, subnet
mask and default gateway.
Windows 2000/NT/XP
The following example figures use the default Windows XP GUI theme.
1
Click start (Start in Windows 2000/NT), Settings, Control Panel.
Figure 142 Windows XP: Start Menu
NBG4604 User’s Guide
235
Appendix C Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
2
In the Control Panel, double-click Network Connections (Network and Dialup Connections in Windows 2000/NT).
Figure 143 Windows XP: Control Panel
3
Right-click Local Area Connection and then click Properties.
Figure 144 Windows XP: Control Panel: Network Connections: Properties
236
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Appendix C Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
4
Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) (under the General tab in Win XP) and then
click Properties.
Figure 145 Windows XP: Local Area Connection Properties
5
The Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window opens (the General tab in
Windows XP).
• If you have a dynamic IP address click Obtain an IP address
automatically.
• If you have a static IP address click Use the following IP Address and fill in
the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
237
Appendix C Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
• Click Advanced.
Figure 146 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties
6
If you do not know your gateway's IP address, remove any previously installed
gateways in the IP Settings tab and click OK.
Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses:
• In the IP Settings tab, in IP addresses, click Add.
• In TCP/IP Address, type an IP address in IP address and a subnet mask in
Subnet mask, and then click Add.
• Repeat the above two steps for each IP address you want to add.
• Configure additional default gateways in the IP Settings tab by clicking Add
in Default gateways.
• In TCP/IP Gateway Address, type the IP address of the default gateway in
Gateway. To manually configure a default metric (the number of transmission
hops), clear the Automatic metric check box and type a metric in Metric.
• Click Add.
• Repeat the previous three steps for each default gateway you want to add.
238
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Appendix C Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
• Click OK when finished.
Figure 147 Windows XP: Advanced TCP/IP Properties
7
In the Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window (the General tab in
Windows XP):
• Click Obtain DNS server address automatically if you do not know your
DNS server IP address(es).
• If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click Use the following DNS
server addresses, and type them in the Preferred DNS server and
Alternate DNS server fields.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
239
Appendix C Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
If you have previously configured DNS servers, click Advanced and then the
DNS tab to order them.
Figure 148 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties
8
Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window.
9
Click Close (OK in Windows 2000/NT) to close the Local Area Connection
Properties window.
10
Close the Network Connections window (Network and Dial-up Connections
in Windows 2000/NT).
11 Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer (if prompted).
Verifying Settings
240
1
Click Start, All Programs, Accessories and then Command Prompt.
2
In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You
can also open Network Connections, right-click a network connection, click
Status and then click the Support tab.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Appendix C Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Macintosh OS 8/9
1
Click the Apple menu, Control Panel and double-click TCP/IP to open the TCP/
IP Control Panel.
Figure 149 Macintosh OS 8/9: Apple Menu
NBG4604 User’s Guide
241
Appendix C Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
2
Select Ethernet built-in from the Connect via list.
Figure 150 Macintosh OS 8/9: TCP/IP
3
For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP Server from the
Configure: list.
4
For statically assigned settings, do the following:
• From the Configure box, select Manually.
• Type your IP address in the IP Address box.
• Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box.
• Type the IP address of your Prestige in the Router address box.
5
Close the TCP/IP Control Panel.
6
Click Save if prompted, to save changes to your configuration.
7
Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer (if prompted).
Verifying Settings
Check your TCP/IP properties in the TCP/IP Control Panel window.
242
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Appendix C Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Macintosh OS X
1
Click the Apple menu, and click System Preferences to open the System
Preferences window.
Figure 151 Macintosh OS X: Apple Menu
2
Click Network in the icon bar.
• Select Automatic from the Location list.
• Select Built-in Ethernet from the Show list.
• Click the TCP/IP tab.
3
For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP from the Configure list.
Figure 152 Macintosh OS X: Network
NBG4604 User’s Guide
243
Appendix C Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
4
For statically assigned settings, do the following:
• From the Configure box, select Manually.
• Type your IP address in the IP Address box.
• Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box.
• Type the IP address of your Prestige in the Router address box.
5
Click Apply Now and close the window.
6
Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer (if prompted).
Verifying Settings
Check your TCP/IP properties in the Network window.
Linux
This section shows you how to configure your computer’s TCP/IP settings in Red
Hat Linux 9.0. Procedure, screens and file location may vary depending on your
Linux distribution and release version.
Note: Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator.
Using the K Desktop Environment (KDE)
Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address using the KDE.
1
Click the Red Hat button (located on the bottom left corner), select System
Setting and click Network.
Figure 153 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: Devices
244
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Appendix C Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
2
Double-click on the profile of the network card you wish to configure. The
Ethernet Device General screen displays as shown.
Figure 154 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Ethernet Device: General
• If you have a dynamic IP address click Automatically obtain IP address
settings with and select dhcp from the drop down list.
• If you have a static IP address click Statically set IP Addresses and fill in
the Address, Subnet mask, and Default Gateway Address fields.
3
Click OK to save the changes and close the Ethernet Device General screen.
4
If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click the DNS tab in the Network
Configuration screen. Enter the DNS server information in the fields provided.
Figure 155 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: DNS
NBG4604 User’s Guide
245
Appendix C Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
5
Click the Devices tab.
6
Click the Activate button to apply the changes. The following screen displays.
Click Yes to save the changes in all screens.
Figure 156 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: Activate
7
After the network card restart process is complete, make sure the Status is
Active in the Network Configuration screen.
Using Configuration Files
Follow the steps below to edit the network configuration files and set your
computer IP address.
1
Assuming that you have only one network card on the computer, locate the
ifconfig-eth0 configuration file (where eth0 is the name of the Ethernet card).
Open the configuration file with any plain text editor.
• If you have a dynamic IP address, enter dhcp in the BOOTPROTO= field. The
following figure shows an example.
Figure 157 Red Hat 9.0: Dynamic IP Address Setting in ifconfig-eth0
DEVICE=eth0
ONBOOT=yes
BOOTPROTO=dhcp
USERCTL=no
PEERDNS=yes
TYPE=Ethernet
246
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Appendix C Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
• If you have a static IP address, enter static in the BOOTPROTO= field. Type
IPADDR= followed by the IP address (in dotted decimal notation) and type
NETMASK= followed by the subnet mask. The following example shows an
example where the static IP address is 192.168.1.10 and the subnet mask is
255.255.255.0.
Figure 158 Red Hat 9.0: Static IP Address Setting in ifconfig-eth0
DEVICE=eth0
ONBOOT=yes
BOOTPROTO=static
IPADDR=192.168.1.10
NETMASK=255.255.255.0
USERCTL=no
PEERDNS=yes
TYPE=Ethernet
2
If you know your DNS server IP address(es), enter the DNS server information in
the resolv.conf file in the /etc directory. The following figure shows an example
where two DNS server IP addresses are specified.
Figure 159 Red Hat 9.0: DNS Settings in resolv.conf
nameserver 172.23.5.1
nameserver 172.23.5.2
3
After you edit and save the configuration files, you must restart the network card.
Enter./network restart in the /etc/rc.d/init.d directory. The following figure
shows an example.
Figure 160 Red Hat 9.0: Restart Ethernet Card
[root@localhost init.d]# network restart
Shutting down interface eth0:
Shutting down loopback interface:
Setting network parameters:
Bringing up loopback interface:
Bringing up interface eth0:
NBG4604 User’s Guide
[OK]
[OK]
[OK]
[OK]
[OK]
247
Appendix C Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
25.1.1 Verifying Settings
Enter ifconfig in a terminal screen to check your TCP/IP properties.
Figure 161 Red Hat 9.0: Checking TCP/IP Properties
[root@localhost]# ifconfig
eth0
Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:50:BA:72:5B:44
inet addr:172.23.19.129 Bcast:172.23.19.255 Mask:255.255.255.0
UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1
RX packets:717 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:13 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
collisions:0 txqueuelen:100
RX bytes:730412 (713.2 Kb) TX bytes:1570 (1.5 Kb)
Interrupt:10 Base address:0x1000
[root@localhost]#
248
NBG4604 User’s Guide
APPENDIX
D
Wireless LANs
Wireless LAN Topologies
This section discusses ad-hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies.
Ad-hoc Wireless LAN Configuration
The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent (Ad-hoc) WLAN that connects
a set of computers with wireless stations (A, B, C). Any time two or more wireless
adapters are within range of each other, they can set up an independent network,
which is commonly referred to as an Ad-hoc network or Independent Basic Service
Set (IBSS). The following diagram shows an example of notebook computers
using wireless adapters to form an Ad-hoc wireless LAN.
Figure 162 Peer-to-Peer Communication in an Ad-hoc Network
BSS
A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless
stations or between a wireless station and a wired network client go through one
access point (AP).
Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless stations in the BSS. When Intra-BSS is
enabled, wireless station A and B can access the wired network and communicate
NBG4604 User’s Guide
249
Appendix D Wireless LANs
with each other. When Intra-BSS is disabled, wireless station A and B can still
access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other.
Figure 163 Basic Service Set
ESS
An Extended Service Set (ESS) consists of a series of overlapping BSSs, each
containing an access point, with each access point connected together by a wired
network. This wired connection between APs is called a Distribution System (DS).
This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN. The Access
Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also mediate
wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood.
250
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Appendix D Wireless LANs
An ESSID (ESS IDentification) uniquely identifies each ESS. All access points and
their associated wireless stations within the same ESS must have the same ESSID
in order to communicate.
Figure 164 Infrastructure WLAN
Channel
A channel is the radio frequency(ies) used by IEEE 802.11a/b/g wireless devices.
Channels available depend on your geographical area. You may have a choice of
channels (for your region) so you should use a different channel than an adjacent
AP (access point) to reduce interference. Interference occurs when radio signals
from different access points overlap causing interference and degrading
performance.
Adjacent channels partially overlap however. To avoid interference due to overlap,
your AP should be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an
adjacent AP is using. For example, if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent
AP is using channel 1, then you need to select a channel between 6 or 11.
RTS/CTS
A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access
point, but are not within range of each other. The following figure illustrates a
hidden node. Both stations (STA) are within range of the access point (AP) or
NBG4604 User’s Guide
251
Appendix D Wireless LANs
wireless gateway, but out-of-range of each other, so they cannot "hear" each
other, that is they do not know if the channel is currently being used. Therefore,
they are considered hidden from each other.
Figure 165
RTS/CTS
When station A sends data to the AP, it might not know that the station B is
already using the channel. If these two stations send data at the same time,
collisions may occur when both sets of data arrive at the AP at the same time,
resulting in a loss of messages for both stations.
RTS/CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes. An RTS/CTS
defines the biggest size data frame you can send before an RTS (Request To
Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake is invoked.
When a data frame exceeds the RTS/CTS value you set (between 0 to 2432
bytes), the station that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS
(Request To Send) message to the AP for permission to send it. The AP then
responds with a CTS (Clear to Send) message to all other stations within its range
to notify them to defer their transmission. It also reserves and confirms with the
requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission.
Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS/CTS directly to the AP
without the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake.
You should only configure RTS/CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on
your network and the "cost" of resending large frames is more than the extra
network overhead involved in the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send)
handshake.
If the RTS/CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value (see
next), then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never
occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size.
Note: Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could
negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy.
252
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Appendix D Wireless LANs
Fragmentation Threshold
A Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size (between 256
and 2432 bytes) that can be sent in the wireless network before the AP will
fragment the packet into smaller data frames.
A large Fragmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to
interference while you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or
networks that are prone to interference.
If the Fragmentation Threshold value is smaller than the RTS/CTS value (see
previously) you set then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send)
handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach
RTS/CTS size.
Preamble Type
A preamble is used to synchronize the transmission timing in your wireless
network. There are two preamble modes: Long and Short.
Short preamble takes less time to process and minimizes overhead, so it should
be used in a good wireless network environment when all wireless stations
support it.
Select Long if you have a ‘noisy’ network or are unsure of what preamble mode
your wireless stations support as all IEEE 802.11b compliant wireless adapters
must support long preamble. However, not all wireless adapters support short
preamble. Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode the wireless
adapters support, to ensure interpretability between the AP and the wireless
stations and to provide more reliable communication in ‘noisy’ networks.
Select Dynamic to have the AP automatically use short preamble when all
wireless stations support it, otherwise the AP uses long preamble.
Note: The AP and the wireless stations MUST use the same preamble mode in order
to communicate.
IEEE 802.11g Wireless LAN
IEEE 802.11g is fully compatible with the IEEE 802.11b standard. This means an
IEEE 802.11b adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802.11g access point
(and vice versa) at 11 Mbps or lower depending on range. IEEE 802.11g has
NBG4604 User’s Guide
253
Appendix D Wireless LANs
several intermediate rate steps between the maximum and minimum data rates.
The IEEE 802.11g data rate and modulation are as follows:
Table 87 IEEE 802.11g
DATA RATE
(MBPS)
MODULATION
1
DBPSK (Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed)
2
DQPSK (Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying)
5.5 / 11
CCK (Complementary Code Keying)
6/9/12/18/24/36/
48/54
OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing)
IEEE 802.1x
In June 2001, the IEEE 802.1x standard was designed to extend the features of
IEEE 802.11 to support extended authentication as well as providing additional
accounting and control features. It is supported by Windows XP and a number of
network devices. Some advantages of IEEE 802.1x are:
• User based identification that allows for roaming.
• Support for RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service, RFC 2138,
2139) for centralized user profile and accounting management on a network
RADIUS server.
• Support for EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol, RFC 2486) that allows
additional authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access
point or the wireless stations.
RADIUS
RADIUS is based on a client-server model that supports authentication,
authorization and accounting. The access point is the client and the server is the
RADIUS server. The RADIUS server handles the following tasks:
• Authentication
Determines the identity of the users.
• Authorization
Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are
connected to the network.
• Accounting
Keeps track of the client’s network activity.
RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay
between the wireless station and the network RADIUS server.
254
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Appendix D Wireless LANs
Types of RADIUS Messages
The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point
and the RADIUS server for user authentication:
• Access-Request
Sent by an access point requesting authentication.
• Access-Reject
Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access.
• Access-Accept
Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access.
• Access-Challenge
Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access.
The access point sends a proper response from the user and then sends another
Access-Request message.
The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point
and the RADIUS server for user accounting:
• Accounting-Request
Sent by the access point requesting accounting.
• Accounting-Response
Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting.
In order to ensure network security, the access point and the RADIUS server use a
shared secret key, which is a password, they both know. The key is not sent over
the network. In addition to the shared key, password information exchanged is
also encrypted to protect the network from unauthorized access.
Types of Authentication
This appendix discusses some popular authentication types: EAP-MD5, EAP-TLS,
EAP-TTLS, PEAP and LEAP.
The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server or the AP.
Consult your network administrator for more information.
EAP-MD5 (Message-Digest Algorithm 5)
MD5 authentication is the simplest one-way authentication method. The
authentication server sends a challenge to the wireless station. The wireless
station ‘proves’ that it knows the password by encrypting the password with the
challenge and sends back the information. Password is not sent in plain text.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
255
Appendix D Wireless LANs
However, MD5 authentication has some weaknesses. Since the authentication
server needs to get the plaintext passwords, the passwords must be stored. Thus
someone other than the authentication server may access the password file. In
addition, it is possible to impersonate an authentication server as MD5
authentication method does not perform mutual authentication. Finally, MD5
authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session
key. You must configure WEP encryption keys for data encryption.
EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security)
With EAP-TLS, digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless
stations for mutual authentication. The server presents a certificate to the client.
After validating the identity of the server, the client sends a different certificate to
the server. The exchange of certificates is done in the open before a secured
tunnel is created. This makes user identity vulnerable to passive attacks. A digital
certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the sender’s identity.
However, to implement EAP-TLS, you need a Certificate Authority (CA) to handle
certificates, which imposes a management overhead.
EAP-TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Service)
EAP-TTLS is an extension of the EAP-TLS authentication that uses certificates for
only the server-side authentications to establish a secure connection. Client
authentication is then done by sending username and password through the
secure connection, thus client identity is protected. For client authentication, EAPTTLS supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as PAP,
CHAP, MS-CHAP and MS-CHAP v2.
PEAP (Protected EAP)
Like EAP-TTLS, server-side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure
connection, then use simple username and password methods through the
secured connection to authenticate the clients, thus hiding client identity.
However, PEAP only supports EAP methods, such as EAP-MD5, EAP-MSCHAPv2
and EAP-GTC (EAP-Generic Token Card), for client authentication. EAP-GTC is
implemented only by Cisco.
LEAP
LEAP (Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol) is a Cisco implementation of
IEEE 802.1x.
Dynamic WEP Key Exchange
The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server. This key
expires when the wireless connection times out, disconnects or reauthentication
times out. A new WEP key is generated each time reauthentication is performed.
256
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Appendix D Wireless LANs
If this feature is enabled, it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key
in the Wireless screen. You may still configure and store keys here, but they will
not be used while Dynamic WEP is enabled.
Note: EAP-MD5 cannot be used with dynamic WEP key exchange
For added security, certificate-based authentications (EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS and
PEAP) use dynamic keys for data encryption. They are often deployed in corporate
environments, but for public deployment, a simple user name and password pair
is more practical. The following table is a comparison of the features of
authentication types.
Table 88 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types
EAP-MD5
EAP-TLS
EAP-TTLS
PEAP
LEAP
Mutual Authentication
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Certificate – Client
No
Yes
Optional
Optional
No
Certificate – Server
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Dynamic Key Exchange
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Credential Integrity
None
Strong
Strong
Strong
Moderate
Deployment Difficulty
Easy
Hard
Moderate
Moderate
Moderate
Client Identity
Protection
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
WPA(2)
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard. WPA2
(IEEE 802.11i) is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption,
authentication and key management than WPA.
Key differences between WPA(2) and WEP are improved data encryption and user
authentication.
Encryption
Both WPA and WPA2 improve data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity
Protocol (TKIP), Message Integrity Check (MIC) and IEEE 802.1x. In addition to
TKIP, WPA2 also uses Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) in the Counter mode
with Cipher block chaining Message authentication code Protocol (CCMP) to offer
stronger encryption.
Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) uses 128-bit keys that are dynamically
generated and distributed by the authentication server. It includes a per-packet
key mixing function, a Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael, an
extended initialization vector (IV) with sequencing rules, and a re-keying
mechanism.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
257
Appendix D Wireless LANs
TKIP regularly changes and rotates the encryption keys so that the same
encryption key is never used twice. The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise
Master Key (PMK) key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and
management system, using the pair-wise key to dynamically generate unique data
encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated
between the AP and the wireless clients. This all happens in the background
automatically.
WPA2 AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is a block cipher that uses a 256-bit
mathematical algorithm called Rijndael.
The Message Integrity Check (MIC) is designed to prevent an attacker from
capturing data packets, altering them and resending them. The MIC provides a
strong mathematical function in which the receiver and the transmitter each
compute and then compare the MIC. If they do not match, it is assumed that the
data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped.
By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating
an integrity checking mechanism (MIC), TKIP makes it much more difficult to
decode data on a Wi-Fi network than WEP, making it difficult for an intruder to
break into the network.
The encryption mechanisms used for WPA and WPA-PSK are the same. The only
difference between the two is that WPA-PSK uses a simple common password,
instead of user-specific credentials. The common-password approach makes WPAPSK susceptible to brute-force password-guessing attacks but it's still an
improvement over WEP as it employs an easier-to-use, consistent, single,
alphanumeric password.
User Authentication
WPA or WPA2 applies IEEE 802.1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to
authenticate wireless clients using an external RADIUS database.
If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external
RADIUS server, use WPA2 for stronger data encryption. If you don't have an
external RADIUS server, you should use WPA2 -PSK (WPA2 -Pre-Shared Key) that
only requires a single (identical) password entered into each access point, wireless
gateway and wireless client. As long as the passwords match, a wireless client will
be granted access to a WLAN.
If the AP or the wireless clients do not support WPA2, just use WPA or WPA-PSK
depending on whether you have an external RADIUS server or not.
Select WEP only when the AP and/or wireless clients do not support WPA or WPA2.
WEP is less secure than WPA or WPA2.
258
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Appendix D Wireless LANs
25.1.2 WPA(2)-PSK Application Example
A WPA(2)-PSK application looks as follows.
1
First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients. The Pre-Shared
Key (PSK) must consist of between 8 and 63 ASCII characters (including spaces
and symbols).
2
The AP checks each wireless client's password and (only) allows it to join the
network if the password matches.
3
The AP derives and distributes keys to the wireless clients.
4
The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process to encrypt
data exchanged between them.
Figure 166 WPA(2)-PSK Authentication
25.1.3 WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example
You need the IP address of the RADIUS server, its port number (default is 1812),
and the RADIUS shared secret. A WPA(2) application example with an external
RADIUS server looks as follows. "A" is the RADIUS server. "DS" is the distribution
system.
1
The AP passes the wireless client's authentication request to the RADIUS server.
2
The RADIUS server then checks the user's identification against its database and
grants or denies network access accordingly.
3
The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key (PMK) key to the AP that
then sets up a key hierarchy and management system, using the pair-wise key to
dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet
that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
259
Appendix D Wireless LANs
Security Parameters Summary
Refer to this table to see what other security parameters you should configure for
each Authentication Method/ key management protocol type. MAC address filters
are not dependent on how you configure these security features.
Table 89 Wireless Security Relational Matrix
AUTHENTICATION
METHOD/ KEY
MANAGEMENT
PROTOCOL
ENCRYPTIO ENTER
IEEE 802.1X
N METHOD MANUAL KEY
Open
None
No
Disable
Enable without Dynamic WEP
Key
Open
Shared
260
WEP
WEP
No
Enable with Dynamic WEP
Key
Yes
Enable without Dynamic WEP
Key
Yes
Disable
No
Enable with Dynamic WEP
Key
Yes
Enable without Dynamic WEP
Key
Yes
Disable
WPA
TKIP
No
Enable
WPA-PSK
TKIP
Yes
Enable
WPA2
AES
No
Enable
WPA2-PSK
AES
Yes
Enable
NBG4604 User’s Guide
APPENDIX
E
Services
The following table lists some commonly-used services and their associated
protocols and port numbers.
• Name: This is a short, descriptive name for the service. You can use this one or
create a different one, if you like.
• Protocol: This is the type of IP protocol used by the service. If this is TCP/
UDP, then the service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP. If this is
User-Defined, the Port(s) is the IP protocol number, not the port number.
• Port(s): This value depends on the Protocol.
• If the Protocol is TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP, this is the IP port number.
• If the Protocol is USER, this is the IP protocol number.
• Description: This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service
or the situations in which this service is used.
Table 90 Examples of Services
NAME
PROTOCOL
PORT(S)
DESCRIPTION
AH
(IPSEC_TUNNEL)
User-Defined
51
The IPSEC AH (Authentication Header)
tunneling protocol uses this service.
AIM
TCP
5190
AOL’s Internet Messenger service.
AUTH
TCP
113
Authentication protocol used by some
servers.
BGP
TCP
179
Border Gateway Protocol.
BOOTP_CLIENT
UDP
68
DHCP Client.
BOOTP_SERVER
UDP
67
DHCP Server.
CU-SEEME
TCP/UDP
7648
TCP/UDP
24032
A popular videoconferencing solution
from White Pines Software.
DNS
TCP/UDP
53
Domain Name Server, a service that
matches web names (e.g.
www.zyxel.com) to IP numbers.
ESP
(IPSEC_TUNNEL)
User-Defined
50
The IPSEC ESP (Encapsulation
Security Protocol) tunneling protocol
uses this service.
FINGER
TCP
79
Finger is a UNIX or Internet related
command that can be used to find out
if a user is logged on.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
261
Appendix E Services
Table 90 Examples of Services (continued)
262
NAME
PROTOCOL
PORT(S)
DESCRIPTION
FTP
TCP
20
TCP
21
File Transfer Program, a program to
enable fast transfer of files, including
large files that may not be possible by
e-mail.
H.323
TCP
1720
NetMeeting uses this protocol.
HTTP
TCP
80
Hyper Text Transfer Protocol - a client/
server protocol for the world wide
web.
HTTPS
TCP
443
HTTPS is a secured http session often
used in e-commerce.
ICMP
User-Defined
1
Internet Control Message Protocol is
often used for diagnostic purposes.
ICQ
UDP
4000
This is a popular Internet chat
program.
IGMP
(MULTICAST)
User-Defined
2
Internet Group Multicast Protocol is
used when sending packets to a
specific group of hosts.
IKE
UDP
500
The Internet Key Exchange algorithm
is used for key distribution and
management.
IMAP4
TCP
143
The Internet Message Access Protocol
is used for e-mail.
IMAP4S
TCP
993
This is a more secure version of IMAP4
that runs over SSL.
IRC
TCP/UDP
6667
This is another popular Internet chat
program.
MSN Messenger
TCP
1863
Microsoft Networks’ messenger
service uses this protocol.
NetBIOS
TCP/UDP
137
TCP/UDP
138
The Network Basic Input/Output
System is used for communication
between computers in a LAN.
TCP/UDP
139
TCP/UDP
445
NEW-ICQ
TCP
5190
An Internet chat program.
NEWS
TCP
144
A protocol for news groups.
NFS
UDP
2049
Network File System - NFS is a client/
server distributed file service that
provides transparent file sharing for
network environments.
NNTP
TCP
119
Network News Transport Protocol is
the delivery mechanism for the
USENET newsgroup service.
PING
User-Defined
1
Packet INternet Groper is a protocol
that sends out ICMP echo requests to
test whether or not a remote host is
reachable.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Appendix E Services
Table 90 Examples of Services (continued)
NAME
PROTOCOL
PORT(S)
DESCRIPTION
POP3
TCP
110
Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a
client computer get e-mail from a
POP3 server through a temporary
connection (TCP/IP or other).
POP3S
TCP
995
This is a more secure version of POP3
that runs over SSL.
PPTP
TCP
1723
Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol
enables secure transfer of data over
public networks. This is the control
channel.
PPTP_TUNNEL
(GRE)
User-Defined
47
PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling
Protocol) enables secure transfer of
data over public networks. This is the
data channel.
RCMD
TCP
512
Remote Command Service.
REAL_AUDIO
TCP
7070
A streaming audio service that
enables real time sound over the web.
REXEC
TCP
514
Remote Execution Daemon.
RLOGIN
TCP
513
Remote Login.
ROADRUNNER
TCP/UDP
1026
This is an ISP that provides services
mainly for cable modems.
RTELNET
TCP
107
Remote Telnet.
RTSP
TCP/UDP
554
The Real Time Streaming (media
control) Protocol (RTSP) is a remote
control for multimedia on the
Internet.
SFTP
TCP
115
The Simple File Transfer Protocol is an
old way of transferring files between
computers.
SMTP
TCP
25
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the
message-exchange standard for the
Internet. SMTP enables you to move
messages from one e-mail server to
another.
SMTPS
TCP
465
This is a more secure version of SMTP
that runs over SSL.
SNMP
TCP/UDP
161
Simple Network Management
Program.
SNMP-TRAPS
TCP/UDP
162
Traps for use with the SNMP
(RFC:1215).
SQL-NET
TCP
1521
Structured Query Language is an
interface to access data on many
different types of database systems,
including mainframes, midrange
systems, UNIX systems and network
servers.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
263
Appendix E Services
Table 90 Examples of Services (continued)
264
NAME
PROTOCOL
PORT(S)
DESCRIPTION
SSDP
UDP
1900
The Simple Service Discovery Protocol
supports Universal Plug-and-Play
(UPnP).
SSH
TCP/UDP
22
Secure Shell Remote Login Program.
STRM WORKS
UDP
1558
Stream Works Protocol.
SYSLOG
UDP
514
Syslog allows you to send system logs
to a UNIX server.
TACACS
UDP
49
Login Host Protocol used for (Terminal
Access Controller Access Control
System).
TELNET
TCP
23
Telnet is the login and terminal
emulation protocol common on the
Internet and in UNIX environments. It
operates over TCP/IP networks. Its
primary function is to allow users to
log into remote host systems.
TFTP
UDP
69
Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an
Internet file transfer protocol similar
to FTP, but uses the UDP (User
Datagram Protocol) rather than TCP
(Transmission Control Protocol).
VDOLIVE
TCP
7000
UDP
userdefined
A videoconferencing solution. The UDP
port number is specified in the
application.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
APPENDIX
F
Open Software Announcements
End-User License Agreement for “NBG4604”
WARNING: ZyXEL Communications Corp. IS WILLING TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE TO YOU ONLY UPON THE
CONDITION THAT YOU ACCEPT ALL OF THE TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. PLEASE
READ THE TERMS CAREFULLY BEFORE COMPLETING THE INSTALLATION PROCESS AS INSTALLING THE
SOFTWARE WILL INDICATE YOUR ASSENT TO THEM. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS, THEN ZyXEL,
IS UNWILLING TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE TO YOU, IN WHICH EVENT YOU SHOULD RETURN THE UNINSTALLED SOFTWARE AND PACKAGING TO THE PLACE FROM WHICH IT WAS ACQUIRED OR ZyXEL, AND YOUR
MONEY WILL BE REFUNDED.
1.
Grant of License for Personal Use
ZyXEL Communications Corp. ("ZyXEL") grants you a non-exclusive, non-sublicense, non-transferable license to use the program with which this license is distributed (the "Software"), including any documentation files accompanying the Software
("Documentation"), for internal business use only, for up to the number of users specified in sales order and invoice. You have the
right to make one backup copy of the Software and Documentation solely for archival, back-up or disaster recovery purposes.
You shall not exceed the scope of the license granted hereunder. Any rights not expressly granted by ZyXEL to you are reserved
by ZyXEL, and all implied licenses are disclaimed.
2.
Ownership
You have no ownership rights in the Software. Rather, you have a license to use the Software as long as this License Agreement
remains in full force and effect. Ownership of the Software, Documentation and all intellectual property rights therein shall
remain at all times with ZyXEL. Any other use of the Software by any other entity is strictly forbidden and is a violation of this
License Agreement.
3.
Copyright
The Software and Documentation contain material that is protected by International Copyright Law and trade secret law, and by
international treaty provisions. All rights not granted to you herein are expressly reserved by ZyXEL. You may not remove any
proprietary notice of ZyXEL or any of its licensors from any copy of the Software or Documentation.
4.
Restrictions
You may not publish, display, disclose, sell, rent, lease, modify, store, loan, distribute, or create derivative works of the Software,
or any part thereof. You may not assign, sublicense, convey or otherwise transfer, pledge as security or otherwise encumber the
rights and licenses granted hereunder with respect to the Software. Certain components of the Software, and third party open
source programs included with the Software, have been or may be made available by ZyXEL listed in the below Table (collectively the “Open-Sourced Components”) You may modify or replace only these Open-Sourced Components; provided that you
comply with the terms of this License and any applicable licensing terms governing use of the Open-Sourced Components, which
have been provided on the License Notice as below for the Software. ZyXEL is not obligated to provide any maintenance, technical or other support for the resultant modified Software. You may not copy, reverse engineer, decompile, reverse compile, translate, adapt, or disassemble the Software, or any part thereof, nor shall you attempt to create the source code from the object code
for the Software. Except as and only to the extent expressly permitted in this License, by applicable licensing terms governing use
of the Open-Sourced Components, or by applicable law, you may not market, co-brand, private label or otherwise permit third
parties to link to the Software, or any part thereof. You may not use the Software, or any part thereof, in the operation of a service
bureau or for the benefit of any other person or entity. You may not cause, assist or permit any third party to do any of the forego-
NBG4604 User’s Guide
265
Appendix F Open Software Announcements
ing. Portions of the Software utilize or include third party software and other copyright material. Acknowledgements, licensing
terms and disclaimers for such material are contained in the License Notice as below for the Software, and your use of such material is governed by their respective terms. ZyXEL has provided, as part of the Software package, access to certain third party software as a convenience. To the extent that the Software contains third party software, ZyXEL has no express or implied obligation
to provide any technical or other support for such software. Please contact the appropriate software vendor or manufacturer
directly for technical support and customer service related to its software and products.
5.
Confidentiality
You acknowledge that the Software contains proprietary trade secrets of ZyXEL and you hereby agree to maintain the confidentiality of the Software using at least as great a degree of care as you use to maintain the confidentiality of your own most confidential information. You agree to reasonably communicate the terms and conditions of this License Agreement to those persons
employed by you who come into contact with the Software, and to use reasonable best efforts to ensure their compliance with
such terms and conditions, including, without limitation, not knowingly permitting such persons to use any portion of the Software for the purpose of deriving the source code of the Software.
6.
No Warranty
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS." TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, ZyXEL DISCLAIMS
ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. ZyXEL DOES NOT
WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET ANY REQUIREMENTS OR NEEDS
YOU MAY HAVE, OR THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL OPERATE ERROR FREE, OR IN AN UNINTERUPTED FASHION,
OR THAT ANY DEFECTS OR ERRORS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED, OR THAT THE SOFTWARE IS
COMPATIBLE WITH ANY PARTICULAR PLATFORM. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE WAIVER OR
EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THEY MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IF THIS EXCLUSION IS HELD TO BE
UNENFORCEABLE BY A COURT OF COMPETENT JURISDICTION, THEN ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO A PERIOD OF THIRTY (30) DAYS FROM THE DATE OF PURCHASE OF
THE SOFTWARE, AND NO WARRANTIES SHALL APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD.
7.
Limitation of Liability
IN NO EVENT WILL ZyXEL BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE, OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR LOSS OF BUSINESS
INFORMATION) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY
ANY OTHER PARTY, EVEN IF ZyXEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. ZyXEL's
AGGREGATE LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO ITS OBLIGATIONS UNDER THIS AGREEMENT OR OTHERWISE WITH
RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION OR OTHERWISE SHALL BE EQUAL TO THE PURCHASE
PRICE, BUT SHALL IN NO EVENT EXCEED THE PRODUCT’S PRICE. BECAUSE SOME STATES/COUNTRIES DO
NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
8.
Export Restrictions
THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT IS EXPRESSLY MADE SUBJECT TO ANY APPLICABLE LAWS, REGULATIONS,
ORDERS, OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS ON THE EXPORT OF THE SOFTWARE OR INFORMATION ABOUT SUCH
SOFTWARE WHICH MAY BE IMPOSED FROM TIME TO TIME. YOU SHALL NOT EXPORT THE SOFTWARE, DOCUMENTATION OR INFORMATION ABOUT THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION WITHOUT COMPLYING WITH
SUCH LAWS, REGULATIONS, ORDERS, OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS.
YOU AGREE TO INDEMNIFY ZyXEL
AGAINST ALL CLAIMS, LOSSES, DAMAGES, LIABILITIES, COSTS AND EXPENSES, INCLUDING REASONABLE
ATTORNEYS' FEES, TO THE EXTENT SUCH CLAIMS ARISE OUT OF ANY BREACH OF THIS SECTION 8.
9.
Audit Rights
ZyXEL SHALL HAVE THE RIGHT, AT ITS OWN EXPENSE, UPON REASONABLE PRIOR NOTICE, TO PERIODICALLY
INSPECT AND AUDIT YOUR RECORDS TO ENSURE YOUR COMPLIANCE WITH THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS
OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT.
10.
Termination
This License Agreement is effective until it is terminated. You may terminate this License Agreement at any time by destroying
266
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Appendix F Open Software Announcements
or returning to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and Documentation in your possession or under your control. ZyXEL may terminate this License Agreement for any reason, including, but not limited to, if ZyXEL finds that you have violated any of the
terms of this License Agreement. Upon notification of termination, you agree to destroy or return to ZyXEL all copies of the
Software and Documentation and to certify in writing that all known copies, including backup copies, have been destroyed. All
provisions relating to confidentiality, proprietary rights, and non-disclosure shall survive the termination of this Software License
Agreement.
11.
General
This License Agreement shall be construed, interpreted and governed by the laws of Republic of China without regard to conflicts
of laws provisions thereof. The exclusive forum for any disputes arising out of or relating to this License Agreement shall be an
appropriate court or Commercial Arbitration Association sitting in ROC, Taiwan. This License Agreement shall constitute the
entire Agreement between the parties hereto. This License Agreement, the rights granted hereunder, the Software and Documentation shall not be assigned by you without the prior written consent of ZyXEL. Any waiver or modification of this License
Agreement shall only be effective if it is in writing and signed by both parties hereto. If any part of this License Agreement is
found invalid or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, the remainder of this License Agreement shall be interpreted
so as to reasonably effect the intention of the parties.
NOTE: Some components of this product incorporate source code covered under the open source code licenses. To obtain the
source code covered under those Licenses, please check ZyXEL Technical Support ([email protected]) to get it.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
267
Appendix F Open Software Announcements
Open-Sourced Components
3rd party software
Version
Web Address Of The Software License Term
Linux Kernel-2.6.21
2.6.21
http://www.kernel.org/
busybox-1.7.5
1.7.5
http://www.busybox.net/
libesmtp-1.0.4
1.0.4
http://www.stafford.uklinux.net/libesmtp
libupnp-1.6.0
1.6.0
http://pupnp.sourceforge.net/
pcre-6.7
6.7
http://www.pcre.org/
igmpproxy-0.1-beta2
0.1-beta2
http://sourceforge.net/projects/igmpproxy
dnsmasq-2.39
2.39
http://thekelleys.org.uk/dnsmasq/doc.html
iproute2-2.6.16
2-2.6.16
http://www.linuxfoundation.org/en/Net:Iproute2
rp-pppoe-3.8
3.8
http://www.roaringpenguin.com/products/pppoe
iptables-1.3.8
1.3.8
http://www.netfilter.org/projects/iptables/index.html
updatedd-2.6
2.6
http://freshmeat.net/projects/updatedd/
linuxigd-1
1
http://linux-igd.sourceforge.net/index.php
wireless_tools-2.8
2.8
http://www.hpl.hp.com/personal/Jean_Tourrilhes/Linux/Tools.html
bridge-utils-1.2
1.2
http://www.linuxfoundation.org/en/Net:Main_Page
pptp-client-1.7.1
1.7.1
http://pptpclient.sourceforge.net/
ppp-2.4.3
2.4.3
http://ppp.samba.org/
udhcp-0.9.9-pre
0.9.9-pre
http://sources.busybox.net/index.py/trunk/udhcp-web/index.html?revision=9967
ez-ipupdate-3.0.11b8
3.0.11b8
http://ez-ipupdate.com/
uboot-1.1.3
1.1.3
http://www.denx.de/wiki/U-Boot
uclibc-0.9.29
0.9.29
http://www.uclibc.org/
mtd-utils-1.2
1.2
http://git.infradead.org
zlib-1.2.3
1.2.3
http://www.zlib.net/
usb_modeswitch-0.9.7
0.9.7
http://www.draisberghof.de/usb_modeswitch/
Notice
Information herein is subject to change without notice. Companies, names, and data used in examples herein are fictitious unless
otherwise noted. No part may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, except the express written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
This Product includes Linux Kernel-2.6.21, busybox-1.7.5, libesmtp-1.0.4, igmpproxy-0.1-beta2, dnsmasq-2.39, iproute2-2.6.16,
rp-pppoe-3.8, iptables-1.3.8, updatedd-2.6, linuxigd-1, wireless_tools-2.8, bridge-utils-1.2, pptp-client-1.7.1, ppp-2.4.3, udhcp0.9.9-pre, ez-ipupdate-3.0.11b8, uboot-1.1.3, mtd-utils-1.2, usb_modeswitch-0.9.7 software under GPL 2.0 license.
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
268
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Appendix F Open Software Announcements
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its
users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose
authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public
License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure
that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source
code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you
can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the
rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they
know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission
to copy, distribute and/or modify the software. Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone
understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its
recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear
that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work
based on the Program" means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the
Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation
is included without limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you". Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not
restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of
having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all
the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of
this License along with the Program. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option
offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy
and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any
part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a
notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does
not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
NBG4604 User’s Guide
269
Appendix F Open Software Announcements
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to
those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is
a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the
distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on
the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not
bring the other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the
terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of
Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of
physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed
under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, c) Accompany it with the
information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable
work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files,
plus the
scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed
need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. If
distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt
otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this
License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated
so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License
to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from
the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third
parties to this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent
issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this
License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your
obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at
all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies
directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from
distribution of the Program. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the
balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims;
this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system
270
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Appendix F Open Software Announcements
in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is
believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation
excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License
incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such
new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each
version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and
"any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any
version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to
the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software
Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of
all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO
THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME
THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT
HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED
ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR
THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH
HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
All other trademarks or trade names mentioned herein, if any, are the property of their respective owners.
This Product includes uclibc-0.9.29 software under LGPL license.
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. [This is the
first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts
as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Pub-
NBG4604 User’s Guide
271
Appendix F Open Software Announcements
lic Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its
users.
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software packages--typically libraries--of
the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully
about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the
explanations below.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make
sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive
source code or can get
it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you
can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender
these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we
gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must
provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and
recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you
legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the original
author's reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a company cannot
effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any
patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the GNU
Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public
License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free programs.
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only
if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other
code with the library.
We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License because it does Less to protect the user's freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs.
These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license
provides advantages in certain special circumstances.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it
becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a
free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free
software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License. In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library
in non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux
operating system.
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that
is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between
a "work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library". The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the
latter must be combined with the library in order to run.
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODI-
272
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Appendix F Open Software Announcements
FICATION
0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright
holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called
"this License").
Each licensee is addressed as "you".
A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables. The "Library", below, refers to any such software library
or work which has been distributed under these terms. A "work based on the Library" means either the Library or any derivative
work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications
and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term
"modification".)
"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code
means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control
compilation and installation of the library. Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this
License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided
that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep
intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with
the Library. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection
in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and
distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a)
The modified work must itself be a software library. b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that
you changed the files and the date of any change. c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third
parties under the terms of this License. d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied
by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must
make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates,
and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful. (For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a
purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must
still compute square roots.) These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not
derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and
its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as
part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose
permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote
it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is
to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or
distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the
Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public
License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has
appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices. Once this change
is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy. This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a
program that is not a library.
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form
under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
NBG4604 User’s Guide
273
Appendix F Open Software Announcements
source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software
interchange. If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not
compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled
or linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library". Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and
therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because
it contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". The executable is therefore covered by this License.
Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables. When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file
that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not.
Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The
threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law. If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure
layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is
unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the
Library will still fall under Section 6.) Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for
the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are
linked directly with the Library itself.
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a "work that uses the Library" with the Library to produce
a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit
modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications. You must give
prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this
License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the
copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must
do one of these things: a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding
machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under
Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable "work that
uses the Library", as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified
executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the
Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.) b) Use a suitable shared library
mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a
copy of the library already present on the user's computer system, rather than copying library functions into the executable, and
(2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is interfacecompatible with the version that the work was made with. c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three
years, to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this
distribution. d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to
copy the above specified materials from the same place. e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or
that you have already sent this user a copy. For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" must include
any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be
distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components
(compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the
executable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that
you distribute.
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library
facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work
based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things: a)
Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities.
274
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Appendix F Open Software Announcements
This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above. b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that
part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any
attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your
rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their
licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to
do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it.
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from
the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose
any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance
by third parties with this License.
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent
issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this
License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your
obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all.
For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly
or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
refrain entirely from distribution of the Library. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular
circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is
implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is
willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make
thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation
excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License
incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to
time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which
applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later
version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any
version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with
these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the
Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the
free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing
and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO
THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE
NBG4604 User’s Guide
275
Appendix F Open Software Announcements
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT
HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED
ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR
THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH
HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCHDAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS.
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 3, 29 June 2007
Copyright © 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <http://fsf.org/>
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for software and other kinds of works.
The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the works.
By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change all versions of a program--to make sure it remains free software for all its users. We, the Free Software Foundation, use the GNU General Public
License for most of our software; it applies also to any other work released this way by its authors. You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure
that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for them if you wish), that you receive source code or
can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs, and that you know you can do
these things.
To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you these rights or asking you to surrender the rights. Therefore,
you have certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom
of others.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same
freedoms that you received. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these
terms so they know their rights.
Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps: (1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this
License giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it.
For the developers' and authors' protection, the GPL clearly explains that there is no warranty for this free software. For both
users' and authors' sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to authors of previous versions.
Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run modified versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer can do so. This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protecting users' freedom to change the software. The systematic pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to use, which is precisely where it is most
unacceptable. Therefore, we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those products. If such problems
arise substantially in other domains, we stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions of the GPL, as
needed to protect the freedom of users.
Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents. States should not allow patents to restrict development and
use of software on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to avoid the special danger that patents applied to a
free program could make it effectively proprietary. To prevent this, the GPL assures that patents cannot be used to render the program non-free.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS
0. Definitions.
“This License” refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License.
“Copyright” also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of works, such as semiconductor masks.
“The Program” refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License. Each licensee is addressed as “you”. “Licensees”
and “recipients” may be individuals or organizations.
To “modify” a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the
making of an exact copy. The resulting work is called a “modified version” of the earlier work or a work “based on” the earlier
work.
A “covered work” means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the Program.
To “propagate” a work means to do anything with it that, without permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for
infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a computer or modifying a private copy. Propagation includes
copying, distribution (with or without modification), making available to the public, and in some countries other activities as well.
To “convey” a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or receive copies. Mere interaction with a
user through a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying.
An interactive user interface displays “Appropriate Legal Notices” to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2) tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to
the extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the work under this License, and how to view a copy of this
License. If the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion.
276
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Appendix F Open Software Announcements
1. Source Code.
The “source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. “Object code” means any nonsource form of a work.
A “Standard Interface” means an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case
of interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that is widely used among developers working in that language.
The “System Libraries” of an executable work include anything, other than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal
form of packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the
work with that Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available to the public in
source code form. A “Major Component”, in this context, means a major essential component (kernel, window system, and so on)
of the specific operating system (if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to produce the work, or an object
code interpreter used to run it.
The “Corresponding Source” for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to control those activities. However, it does not
include the work's System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free programs which are used unmodified in
performing those activities but which are not part of the work. For example, Corresponding Source includes interface definition
files associated with source files for the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked subprograms that
the work is specifically designed to require, such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those subprograms
and other parts of the work.
The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding Source.
The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same work.
2. Basic Permissions.
All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated
conditions are met. This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program. The output from
running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its content, constitutes a covered work. This License
acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law.
You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise
remains in force. You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively
for you, or provide you with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do not control copyright. Those thus making or running the covered works for you must do so
exclusively on your behalf, under your direction and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you.
Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10 makes it unnecessary.
3. Protecting Users' Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law.
No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under
article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of
such measures.
When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid circumvention of technological measures to the extent
such circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work, and you disclaim any
intention to limit operation or modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the work's users, your or third parties'
legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures.
4. Conveying Verbatim Copies.
You may convey verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously
and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice; keep intact all notices stating that this License and any
non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code; keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and
give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program.
You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey, and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee.
5. Conveying Modified Source Versions.
You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to produce it from the Program, in the form of source code
under the terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:

a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it, and giving a relevant date.

b) The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under this License and any conditions
added under section 7. This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to “keep intact all notices”.

c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this License to anyone who comes into possession of
a copy. This License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7 additional terms, to the whole of the
work, and all its parts, regardless of how they are packaged. This License gives no permission to license the work in
any other way, but it does not invalidate such permission if you have separately received it.

d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the
Program has interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your work need not make them do
so.
A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works, which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work, and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution
medium, is called an “aggregate” if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of the
compilation's users beyond what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a covered work in an aggregate does not cause this
License to apply to the other parts of the aggregate.
6. Conveying Non-Source Forms.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
277
Appendix F Open Software Announcements
You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the
machine-readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, in one of these ways:

a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution
medium), accompanied by the Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange.

b) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution
medium), accompanied by a written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts or
customer support for that product model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price no more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this
conveying of source, or (2) access to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge.

c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written offer to provide the Corresponding Source. This alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and only if you received the object
code with such an offer, in accord with subsection 6b.

d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated place (gratis or for a charge), and offer
equivalent access to the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no further charge. You need
not require recipients to copy the Corresponding Source along with the object code. If the place to copy the object code
is a network server, the Corresponding Source may be on a different server (operated by you or a third party) that supports equivalent copying facilities, provided you maintain clear directions next to the object code saying where to find
the Corresponding Source. Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure
that it is available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements.

e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided you inform other peers where the
object code and Corresponding Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no charge under subsection 6d.
A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need
not be included in conveying the object code work.
A “User Product” is either (1) a “consumer product”, which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family, or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling. In determining whether a
product is a consumer product, doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage. For a particular product received by a particular user, “normally used” refers to a typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the status of the particular user
or of the way in which the particular user actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product. A product is a consumer
product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent
the only significant mode of use of the product.
“Installation Information” for a User Product means any methods, procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to
install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from a modified version of its Corresponding
Source. The information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case prevented
or interfered with solely because modification has been made.
If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying
occurs as part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a fixed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied by the Installation Information. But this requirement does not apply if neither you nor any third party
retains the ability to install modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has been installed in ROM).
The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for the User Product in which it has been modified or installed. Access to a network may be denied when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the operation of
the network or violates the rules and protocols for communication across the network.
Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided, in accord with this section must be in a format that is
publicly documented (and with an implementation available to the public in source code form), and must require no special password or key for unpacking, reading or copying.
7. Additional Terms.
“Additional permissions” are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions. Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in this
License, to the extent that they are valid under applicable law. If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program, that
part may be used separately under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by this License without regard to
the additional permissions.
When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from
any part of it. (Additional permissions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the work.)
You may place additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work, for which you have or can give appropriate
copyright permission.
Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders of that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms:

a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this
License; or

b) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions in that material or in
the Appropriate Legal Notices displayed by works containing it; or

c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or requiring that modified versions of such
material be marked in reasonable ways as different from the original version; or

d) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors of the material; or
278
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Appendix F Open Software Announcements

e) Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade names, trademarks, or service marks;
or

f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that material by anyone who conveys the material
(or modified versions of it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on those licensors and authors.
All other non-permissive additional terms are considered “further restrictions” within the meaning of section 10. If the Program as
you received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a further
restriction, you may remove that term. If a license document contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying
under this License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document, provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying.
If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms.
Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions;
the above requirements apply either way.
8. Termination.
You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to
propagate or modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License (including any patent licenses
granted under the third paragraph of section 11).
However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright
holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation.
Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from
that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice.
Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from
you under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new
licenses for the same material under section 10.
9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies.
You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered
work occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance.
However, nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered work. These actions infringe
copyright if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or propagating a covered work, you indicate your acceptance
of this License to do so.
10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients.
Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify
and propagate that work, subject to this License. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this
License.
An “entity transaction” is a transaction transferring control of an organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an
organization, or merging organizations. If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction, each party to that
transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work the party's predecessor in interest had or
could give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor
in interest, if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts.
You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License. For example, you
may not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate
litigation (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it.
11. Patents.
A “contributor” is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is
based. The work thus licensed is called the contributor's “contributor version”.
A contributor's “essential patent claims” are all patent claims owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or
hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor
version, but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the contributor version. For purposes of this definition, “control” includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the
requirements of this License.
Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free patent license under the contributor's essential patent
claims, to make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version.
In the following three paragraphs, a “patent license” is any express agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to
enforce a patent (such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement). To “grant”
such a patent license to a party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the party.
If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license, and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available
for anyone to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a publicly available network server or other readily
accessible means, then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of
the benefit of the patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner consistent with the requirements of this
License, to extend the patent license to downstream recipients. “Knowingly relying” means you have actual knowledge that, but
for the patent license, your conveying the covered work in a country, or your recipient's use of the covered work in a country,
would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country that you have reason to believe are valid.
If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a
covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate,
modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license you grant is automatically extended to all recipients
of the covered work and works based on it.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
279
Appendix F Open Software Announcements
A patent license is “discriminatory” if it does not include within the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted under this License. You may not convey a covered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing software, under which you
make payment to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the work, and under which the third party
grants, to any of the parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory patent license (a) in connection with
copies of the covered work conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily for and in connection with specific products or compilations that contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement, or that patent license was
granted, prior to 28 March 2007.
Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may
otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law.
12. No Surrender of Others' Freedom.
If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License,
they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously
your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not convey it at all. For
example, if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program.
13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License.
Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work
licensed under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work, and to convey the resulting
work. The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work, but the special requirements of the
GNU Affero General Public License, section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as such.
14. Revised Versions of this License.
The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time.
Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General Public License “or any later version” applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that
numbered version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version
number of the GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that
proxy's public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program.
Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions. However, no additional obligations are imposed on any
author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version.
15. Disclaimer of Warranty.
THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT
WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE
PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD
THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16. Limitation of Liability.
IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT
HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE,
BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES
OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR
OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16.
If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms,
reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with
the Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to
make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
state the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is
found.
<one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or
(at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
280
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Appendix F Open Software Announcements
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
<program> Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course,
your program's commands might be different; for a GUI interface, you would use an “about box”.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if necessary. For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/
>.
The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a
subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you
want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License. But first, please read <http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/why-not-lgpl.html>.
This Product includes libupnp-1.6.0, pcre-6.7, ppp-2.4.3 under BSD license
BSD
Copyright (c) [dates as appropriate to package]
The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
Neither the name of the University nor of the Laboratory may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOS E ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
This Product includes zlib-1.2.3 software under below license
License
/* zlib.h -- interface of the 'zlib' general purpose compression library
NBG4604 User’s Guide
281
Appendix F Open Software Announcements
version 1.2.3, July 18th, 2005
Copyright (C) 1995-2005 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler
This software is provided 'as-is', without any express or implied
warranty. In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages
arising from the use of this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose,
including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it
freely, subject to the following restrictions:
1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not
claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this software
in a product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be
appreciated but is not required.
2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be
misrepresented as being the original software.
3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.
Jean-loup Gailly [email protected]
Mark Adler [email protected]
*/
282
NBG4604 User’s Guide
APPENDIX
G
Legal Information
Copyright
Copyright © 2010 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole,
transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into any language, or
transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic,
optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written
permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. All rights reserved.
Disclaimer
ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any
products, or software described herein. Neither does it convey any license under
its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right
to make changes in any products described herein without notice. This publication
is subject to change without notice.
Certifications
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Statement
The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operations.
This device is designed for the WLAN 2.4 GHz and/or 5 GHz networks throughout
the EC region and Switzerland, with restrictions in France.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
283
Appendix G Legal Information
Ce produit est conçu pour les bandes de fréquences 2,4 GHz et/ou 5 GHz
conformément à la législation Européenne. En France métropolitaine, suivant les
décisions n°03-908 et 03-909 de l’ARCEP, la puissance d’émission ne devra pas
dépasser 10 mW (10 dB) dans le cadre d’une installation WiFi en extérieur pour
les fréquences comprises entre 2454 MHz et 2483,5 MHz.
This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B
digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This device generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy,
and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this device does cause harmful interference to radio/television reception, which
can be determined by turning the device off and on, the user is encouraged to try
to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
1
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
2
Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
3
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
4
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
FCC Radiation Exposure Statement
• This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
• IEEE 802.11b or 802.11g operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmwarelimited to channels 1 through 11.
• To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation
distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this
device and all persons.
Industry Canada Statement
This device complies with RSS-210 of the Industry Canada Rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1
284
this device may not cause interference and
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Appendix G Legal Information
2
this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device
This device has been designed to operate with an antenna having a maximum
gain of 2dBi.
Antenna having a higher gain is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry
Canada. The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms.
To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain
should be so chosen that the EIRP is not more than required for successful
communication.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
IC Radiation Exposure Statement:
This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with
minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body.
注意 !
依據
低功率電波輻射性電機管理辦法
第十二條 經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機，非經許可，公司、商號或使用
者均不得擅自變更頻率、加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能。
第十四條 低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信；經發現
有干擾現象時，應立即停用，並改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用。
前項合法通信，指依電信規定作業之無線電信。低功率射頻電機須忍
受合法通信或工業、科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備之干擾。
本機限在不干擾合法電臺與不受被干擾保障條件下於室內使用。
減少電磁波影響，請妥適使用。
Notices
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This device has been designed for the WLAN 2.4 GHz network throughout the EC
region and Switzerland, with restrictions in France.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du
Canada.
NBG4604 User’s Guide
285
Appendix G Legal Information
Viewing Certifications
1
Go to http://www.zyxel.com.
2
Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product's page.
3
Select the certification you wish to view from this page.
ZyXEL Limited Warranty
ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from
any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the
date of purchase. During the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should
the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or
materials, ZyXEL will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective products or
components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it
shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating
condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally
equivalent product of equal or higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of
ZyXEL. This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified, misused,
tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working
conditions.
Note
Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of
the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied,
including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or
purpose. ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential
damages of any kind to the purchaser.
To obtain the services of this warranty, contact your vendor. You may also refer to
the warranty policy for the region in which you bought the device at http://
www.zyxel.com/web/support_warranty_info.php.
Registration
Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and
information at www.zyxel.com for global products, or at www.us.zyxel.com for
North American products.
286
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Index
Index
A
ACL rule 139
ACS 166
Configuration
backup 192
reset the factory defaults 194
restore 193
Alert 185
content filtering 143
by keyword (in URL) 144
by web feature 143
alternative subnet mask notation 216
copyright 283
AP 21
CPU usage 32, 57
AP (Access Point) 251
CTS (Clear to Send) 252
AP Mode
menu 58
overview 55
status screen 56
D
Address Assignment 102
AP+Bridge 21
Auto-bridge 112
B
Backup configuration 192
Bandwidth management
overview 151
priority 156
services 157
Daylight saving 182
DDNS 131
see also Dynamic DNS
service providers 132
DHCP 35, 117
DHCP server
see also Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DHCP client information 120
DHCP client list 120
DHCP server 114, 117
Bridge/Repeater 21
DHCP table 36, 120
DHCP client information
DHCP status
BSS 249
Dimensions 209
BitTorrent 158
disclaimer 283
C
DNS 50, 119
DNS server
see also Domain name system
CA 256
DNS Server 102
Certificate Authority 256
DNS server 119
certifications 283
notices 285
viewing 286
Domain name 41
vs host name. see also system name
Channel 32, 57, 251
Interference 251
Domain Name System. See DNS.
channel 78
Dynamic DNS 131
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Domain Name System 119
duplex setting 33, 58
287
Index
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 117
General wireless LAN screen 81
Dynamic WEP Key Exchange 256
DynDNS 132
DynDNS see also DDNS 132
DynDNS Wildcard 131
H
Hidden Node 251
HTTP 157
E
Hyper Text Transfer Protocol 157
EAP Authentication 255
e-mail 92
Encryption 257
encryption 80
and local (user) database 80
key 81
WPA compatible 80
I
IANA 222
IBSS 249
IEEE 802.11g 253
ESSID 206
IGMP 103
see also Internet Group Multicast Protocol
version
Extended Service Set 250
IGMP version 103
Extended wireless security 44
Independent Basic Service Set 249
ESS 250
Internet Assigned Numbers Authority
See IANA
F
Factory LAN defaults 114, 117
FCC interference statement 283
File Transfer Program 157
Firewall
ICMP packets 140
ZyXEL device firewall 136
Internet connection
Ethernet
PPPoE. see also PPP over Ethernet
PPTP
WAN connection
Internet connection wizard 44
Internet Group Multicast Protocol 103
IP Address 115, 125
firewall
stateful inspection 135
IP address 50
dynamic
Firmware upload 189
file extension
using HTTP
IP Pool 118
firmware version 32, 57
L
Fragmentation Threshold 253
FTP 162
FTP. see also File Transfer Program 157
LAN 113
IP pool setup 114
LAN overview 113
LAN setup 113
288
G
LAN TCP/IP 114
gateway 148
Link type 33, 57
Language 199
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Index
local (user) database 79
and encryption 80
O
Local Area Network 113
Operating Channel 32, 57
Log 186
operating mode 21
M
P
MAC 87
P2P 158
MAC address 79, 103
cloning 52, 103
peer-to-peer 158
MAC address filter 79
MAC address filtering 87
MAC filter 87
Management Information Base (MIB) 164
managing the device
good habits 22
using the Web Configurator. See Web
Configurator.
using the WPS. See WPS.
MBSSID 21
Media access control 87
Memory usage 32, 57
Metric 149
mode 21
Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet 46, 106
Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol 47, 108
Pool Size 118
Port forwarding 125
default server 125
local server 125
port speed 33, 58
Power Specification 209
PPPoE 46, 106
benefits 46
dial-up connection
see also Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet
46
PPTP 47, 108
see also Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol 47
Multicast 103
IGMP 103
Preamble Mode 253
N
Q
NAT 123, 124, 167, 221
how it works 123
overview 123
routers 167
see also Network Address Translation
Quality of Service (QoS) 90
NAT traversal 171
Navigation Panel 33, 58
navigation panel 33, 58
NetBIOS 104
see also Network Basic Input/Output System
104
Network Address Translation 123, 124
product registration 286
R
RADIUS 254
Shared Secret Key 255
RADIUS Message Types 255
RADIUS Messages 255
RADIUS server 79
registration
product 286
related documentation 3
NBG4604 User’s Guide
289
Index
Remote management 159
and NAT 160
and the firewall 159
limitations 160
remote management session 160
system timeout 160
remote management
FTP 162
Telnet 162
Reset button 30, 194
Reset the device 30
Restore configuration 193
RF (Radio Frequency) 210
RFC 3489 167
Roaming 89
RTS (Request To Send) 252
RTS Threshold 251, 252
RTS/CTS Threshold 78, 89
stateful inspection firewall 135
Static DHCP 118
Static Route 148
Status 30
subnet 213
Subnet Mask 115
subnet mask 50, 214
subnetting 217
Summary
DHCP table 35
Packet statistics 36
Wireless station status 37
syntax conventions 6
Sys Op Mode 195
System General Setup 179
System Name 180
System name 40
vs computer name
System restart 194
S
safety warnings 8
Scheduling 95
Security Parameters 260
Service and port numbers 158
Service Set 82
Service Set IDentification 82
Service Set IDentity. See SSID.
services
and port numbers 261
and protocols 261
T
TCP/IP configuration 117
Telnet 162
Temperature 209
Time setting 181
trigger port 128
Trigger port forwarding 128
example 129
process 129
Simple Network Management Protocol, see
SNMP
SNMP 163, 164
agents 164
Get 164
GetNext 164
Manager 164
managers 164
MIB 164
network components 164
Set 165
Trap 165
versions 163
SSID 32, 78, 82
290
U
Universal Plug and Play 171
application 172
UPnP 171
security issues 172
URL Keyword Blocking 145
Use Authentication 258
user authentication 79
local (user) database 79
RADIUS server 79
NBG4604 User’s Guide
Index
User Name 133
wireless security 206
Wireless tutorial 55, 63
WPS 63
V
VPN 108
W
Wizard setup 39
complete 53
Internet connection 44
system information 40
wireless LAN 42
WLAN
Interference 251
Security Parameters 260
WAN
IP address assignment 49
World Wide Web 157
WAN (Wide Area Network) 101
WPA, WPA2 257
WAN advanced 111
WPS 22
WAN IP address 49
WWW 92, 157
WPA compatible 80
WAN IP address assignment 51
WAN MAC address 103
warranty 286
note 286
X
Web Configurator 22
how to access 28
Overview 27
Xbox Live 158
Web configurator
navigating 30
WEP Encryption 85
WEP encryption 84
WEP key 84
Wildcard 131
Wireless association list 37
wireless channel 206
wireless LAN 206
wireless LAN scheduling 95
Wireless LAN wizard 42
Wireless network
basic guidelines 78
channel 78
encryption 80
example 77
MAC address filter 79
overview 77
security 78
SSID 78
Wireless security 78
overview 78
type 78
NBG4604 User’s Guide
291
Index
292
NBG4604 User’s Guide